US20220278680A1 - Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device - Google Patents
Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20220278680A1 US20220278680A1 US17/742,642 US202217742642A US2022278680A1 US 20220278680 A1 US20220278680 A1 US 20220278680A1 US 202217742642 A US202217742642 A US 202217742642A US 2022278680 A1 US2022278680 A1 US 2022278680A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- thin film
- film transistor
- transistor
- gate
- source
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 claims description 35
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 abstract description 606
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 abstract description 391
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 abstract description 18
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 abstract description 13
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 abstract description 13
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 531
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 88
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 87
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 61
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 61
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 57
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 52
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 50
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 44
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 29
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 29
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 28
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 26
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 26
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 21
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 19
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 19
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 19
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 18
- 229910021424 microcrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 16
- 201000005569 Gout Diseases 0.000 description 15
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 230000005669 field effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 description 15
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 14
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 14
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 238000001312 dry etching Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 13
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical compound [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 11
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 11
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 230000001590 oxidative effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000009832 plasma treatment Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000000623 plasma-assisted chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 9
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 238000005121 nitriding Methods 0.000 description 8
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 8
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000005262 ferroelectric liquid crystals (FLCs) Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 7
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000001039 wet etching Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000004983 Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystal Substances 0.000 description 4
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000001307 helium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052734 helium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N helium atom Chemical compound [He] SWQJXJOGLNCZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 229910052743 krypton Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- DNNSSWSSYDEUBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N krypton atom Chemical compound [Kr] DNNSSWSSYDEUBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052754 neon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- GKAOGPIIYCISHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N neon atom Chemical compound [Ne] GKAOGPIIYCISHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001004 secondary ion mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 4
- WGTYBPLFGIVFAS-UHFFFAOYSA-M tetramethylammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].C[N+](C)(C)C WGTYBPLFGIVFAS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- 229910000838 Al alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M Potassium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[K+] KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silane Chemical compound [SiH4] BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium nitride Chemical compound [Ti]#N NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000001678 elastic recoil detection analysis Methods 0.000 description 3
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000007257 malfunction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003071 parasitic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005001 rutherford backscattering spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000565 sealant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 3
- TXEYQDLBPFQVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrafluoromethane Chemical compound FC(F)(F)F TXEYQDLBPFQVAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WZJUBBHODHNQPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4,6,8-tetramethyl-1,3,5,7,2$l^{3},4$l^{3},6$l^{3},8$l^{3}-tetraoxatetrasilocane Chemical compound C[Si]1O[Si](C)O[Si](C)O[Si](C)O1 WZJUBBHODHNQPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100036285 25-hydroxyvitamin D-1 alpha hydroxylase, mitochondrial Human genes 0.000 description 2
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorane Chemical compound F KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101000875403 Homo sapiens 25-hydroxyvitamin D-1 alpha hydroxylase, mitochondrial Proteins 0.000 description 2
- OAKJQQAXSVQMHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrazine Chemical compound NN OAKJQQAXSVQMHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen bromide Chemical compound Br CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XYFCBTPGUUZFHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphine Chemical compound P XYFCBTPGUUZFHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001237 Raman spectrum Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910018503 SF6 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- BOTDANWDWHJENH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tetraethyl orthosilicate Chemical compound CCO[Si](OCC)(OCC)OCC BOTDANWDWHJENH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WGLPBDUCMAPZCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trioxochromium Chemical compound O=[Cr](=O)=O WGLPBDUCMAPZCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Si].[Ge] Chemical compound [Si].[Ge] LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004380 ashing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- WTEOIRVLGSZEPR-UHFFFAOYSA-N boron trifluoride Chemical compound FB(F)F WTEOIRVLGSZEPR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910000423 chromium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000001879 copper Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007865 diluting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 2
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000036039 immunity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910003437 indium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000000259 microwave plasma-assisted chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910021421 monocrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N neodymium atom Chemical compound [Nd] QEFYFXOXNSNQGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QEHKBHWEUPXBCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen trichloride Chemical compound ClN(Cl)Cl QEHKBHWEUPXBCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GVGCUCJTUSOZKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen trifluoride Chemical compound FN(F)F GVGCUCJTUSOZKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N nonaoxidotritungsten Chemical compound O=[W]1(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O[W](=O)(=O)O1 QGLKJKCYBOYXKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HMMGMWAXVFQUOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane Chemical compound C[Si]1(C)O[Si](C)(C)O[Si](C)(C)O[Si](C)(C)O1 HMMGMWAXVFQUOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000001282 organosilanes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000001020 plasma etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052706 scandium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N scandium atom Chemical compound [Sc] SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910000077 silane Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 2
- SFZCNBIFKDRMGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulfur hexafluoride Chemical compound FS(F)(F)(F)(F)F SFZCNBIFKDRMGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960000909 sulfur hexafluoride Drugs 0.000 description 2
- CZDYPVPMEAXLPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylsilane Chemical compound C[Si](C)(C)C CZDYPVPMEAXLPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N titanium oxide Inorganic materials [Ti]=O OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910001930 tungsten oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000007738 vacuum evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000003462 vein Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[Zn++].[In+3] YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BLIQUJLAJXRXSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-benzyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyrrolidin-1-ium-3-carboxylate Chemical compound C1C(C(=O)O)(C(F)(F)F)CCN1CC1=CC=CC=C1 BLIQUJLAJXRXSG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VXEGSRKPIUDPQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[4-(4-methoxyphenyl)piperazin-1-yl]aniline Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1N1CCN(C=2C=CC(N)=CC=2)CC1 VXEGSRKPIUDPQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7553-56-2 Chemical compound [I] ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910015900 BF3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bromine atom Chemical compound [Br] WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KZBUYRJDOAKODT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine Chemical compound ClCl KZBUYRJDOAKODT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004986 Cholesteric liquid crystals (ChLC) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910019974 CrSi Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004985 Discotic Liquid Crystal Substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylenediamine Chemical compound NCCN PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PXGOKWXKJXAPGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine Chemical compound FF PXGOKWXKJXAPGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100022887 GTP-binding nuclear protein Ran Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101000774835 Heteractis crispa PI-stichotoxin-Hcr2o Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000620756 Homo sapiens GTP-binding nuclear protein Ran Proteins 0.000 description 1
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004976 Lyotropic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910016006 MoSi Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000583 Nd alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004988 Nematic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitric acid Chemical compound O[N+]([O-])=O GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000031481 Pathologic Constriction Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920001665 Poly-4-vinylphenol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101100393821 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) GSP2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910007159 Si(CH3)4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910007264 Si2H6 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004990 Smectic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004974 Thermotropic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Urea Chemical compound NC(N)=O XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000862 absorption spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005407 aluminoborosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005354 aluminosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052788 barium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N barium atom Chemical compound [Ba] DSAJWYNOEDNPEQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzocyclobutene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCC2=C1 UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005388 borosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromine Substances BrBr GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052794 bromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004202 carbamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002041 carbon nanotube Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910021393 carbon nanotube Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920001940 conductive polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000010432 diamond Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910003460 diamond Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 1
- PZPGRFITIJYNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N disilane Chemical compound [SiH3][SiH3] PZPGRFITIJYNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N disiloxane Chemical class [SiH3]O[SiH3] KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009189 diving Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005611 electricity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- QUZPNFFHZPRKJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N germane Chemical compound [GeH4] QUZPNFFHZPRKJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VGRFVJMYCCLWPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium Chemical compound [Ge].[Ge] VGRFVJMYCCLWPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052986 germanium hydride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- FFUAGWLWBBFQJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexamethyldisilazane Chemical compound C[Si](C)(C)N[Si](C)(C)C FFUAGWLWBBFQJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000042 hydrogen bromide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000041 hydrogen chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- IXCSERBJSXMMFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen chloride Substances Cl.Cl IXCSERBJSXMMFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XMBWDFGMSWQBCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen iodide Chemical compound I XMBWDFGMSWQBCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000043 hydrogen iodide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000009616 inductively coupled plasma Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011630 iodine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000013081 microcrystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011259 mixed solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- QKCGXXHCELUCKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[4-[4-(dinaphthalen-2-ylamino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-naphthalen-2-ylnaphthalen-2-amine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(N(C=3C=CC(=CC=3)C=3C=CC(=CC=3)N(C=3C=C4C=CC=CC4=CC=3)C=3C=C4C=CC=CC4=CC=3)C3=CC4=CC=CC=C4C=C3)=CC=C21 QKCGXXHCELUCKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002159 nanocrystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910017604 nitric acid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000073 phosphorus hydride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FAIAAWCVCHQXDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphorus trichloride Chemical compound ClP(Cl)Cl FAIAAWCVCHQXDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000628 photoluminescence spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000767 polyaniline Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000128 polypyrrole Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000123 polythiophene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000005049 silicon tetrachloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- ABTOQLMXBSRXSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon tetrafluoride Chemical compound F[Si](F)(F)F ABTOQLMXBSRXSM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000679 solder Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910001256 stainless steel alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum nitride Chemical compound [Ta]#N MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LEIGGMIFKQLBRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetraethyl silicate Chemical compound CCO[Si](OCC)(OCC)OCC.CCO[Si](OCC)(OCC)OCC LEIGGMIFKQLBRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 1
- FAQYAMRNWDIXMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N trichloroborane Chemical compound ClB(Cl)Cl FAQYAMRNWDIXMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QQQSFSZALRVCSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N triethoxysilane Chemical compound CCO[SiH](OCC)OCC QQQSFSZALRVCSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JOHWNGGYGAVMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N trifluorochlorine Chemical compound FCl(F)F JOHWNGGYGAVMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- -1 tungsten nitride Chemical class 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H03—ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
- H03K—PULSE TECHNIQUE
- H03K17/00—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking
- H03K17/16—Modifications for eliminating interference voltages or currents
- H03K17/161—Modifications for eliminating interference voltages or currents in field-effect transistor switches
- H03K17/162—Modifications for eliminating interference voltages or currents in field-effect transistor switches without feedback from the output circuit to the control circuit
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
- G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
- G09G3/32—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
- G09G3/3208—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED]
- G09G3/3225—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/13306—Circuit arrangements or driving methods for the control of single liquid crystal cells
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
- G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
- G09G3/3648—Control of matrices with row and column drivers using an active matrix
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/34—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source
- G09G3/36—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters by control of light from an independent source using liquid crystals
- G09G3/3611—Control of matrices with row and column drivers
- G09G3/3674—Details of drivers for scan electrodes
- G09G3/3677—Details of drivers for scan electrodes suitable for active matrices only
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C19/00—Digital stores in which the information is moved stepwise, e.g. shift registers
- G11C19/28—Digital stores in which the information is moved stepwise, e.g. shift registers using semiconductor elements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/02—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers
- H01L27/04—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being a semiconductor body
- H01L27/08—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being a semiconductor body including only semiconductor components of a single kind
- H01L27/085—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being a semiconductor body including only semiconductor components of a single kind including field-effect components only
- H01L27/088—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being a semiconductor body including only semiconductor components of a single kind including field-effect components only the components being field-effect transistors with insulated gate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H03—ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
- H03K—PULSE TECHNIQUE
- H03K17/00—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking
- H03K17/51—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking characterised by the components used
- H03K17/56—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking characterised by the components used by the use, as active elements, of semiconductor devices
- H03K17/687—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking characterised by the components used by the use, as active elements, of semiconductor devices the devices being field-effect transistors
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/04—Structural and physical details of display devices
- G09G2300/0404—Matrix technologies
- G09G2300/0408—Integration of the drivers onto the display substrate
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/08—Active matrix structure, i.e. with use of active elements, inclusive of non-linear two terminal elements, in the pixels together with light emitting or modulating elements
- G09G2300/0809—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels
- G09G2300/0819—Several active elements per pixel in active matrix panels used for counteracting undesired variations, e.g. feedback or autozeroing
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
- G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
- G09G2310/0264—Details of driving circuits
- G09G2310/0286—Details of a shift registers arranged for use in a driving circuit
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2310/00—Command of the display device
- G09G2310/02—Addressing, scanning or driving the display screen or processing steps related thereto
- G09G2310/0264—Details of driving circuits
- G09G2310/0289—Details of voltage level shifters arranged for use in a driving circuit
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/04—Maintaining the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/043—Preventing or counteracting the effects of ageing
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/04—Maintaining the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/043—Preventing or counteracting the effects of ageing
- G09G2320/045—Compensation of drifts in the characteristics of light emitting or modulating elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11C—STATIC STORES
- G11C19/00—Digital stores in which the information is moved stepwise, e.g. shift registers
- G11C19/28—Digital stores in which the information is moved stepwise, e.g. shift registers using semiconductor elements
- G11C19/282—Digital stores in which the information is moved stepwise, e.g. shift registers using semiconductor elements with charge storage in a depletion layer, i.e. charge coupled devices [CCD]
- G11C19/285—Peripheral circuits, e.g. for writing into the first stage; for reading-out of the last stage
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/02—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers
- H01L27/12—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body
- H01L27/1214—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components specially adapted for rectifying, oscillating, amplifying or switching and having potential barriers; including integrated passive circuit elements having potential barriers the substrate being other than a semiconductor body, e.g. an insulating body comprising a plurality of TFTs formed on a non-semiconducting substrate, e.g. driving circuits for AMLCDs
- H01L27/1259—Multistep manufacturing methods
- H01L27/1288—Multistep manufacturing methods employing particular masking sequences or specially adapted masks, e.g. half-tone mask
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L29/00—Semiconductor devices specially adapted for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating or switching and having potential barriers; Capacitors or resistors having potential barriers, e.g. a PN-junction depletion layer or carrier concentration layer; Details of semiconductor bodies or of electrodes thereof ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/02—Semiconductor bodies ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/04—Semiconductor bodies ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor characterised by their crystalline structure, e.g. polycrystalline, cubic or particular orientation of crystalline planes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L29/00—Semiconductor devices specially adapted for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating or switching and having potential barriers; Capacitors or resistors having potential barriers, e.g. a PN-junction depletion layer or carrier concentration layer; Details of semiconductor bodies or of electrodes thereof ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/66—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/68—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor controllable by only the electric current supplied, or only the electric potential applied, to an electrode which does not carry the current to be rectified, amplified or switched
- H01L29/76—Unipolar devices, e.g. field effect transistors
- H01L29/772—Field effect transistors
- H01L29/78—Field effect transistors with field effect produced by an insulated gate
- H01L29/786—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film
- H01L29/78696—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film characterised by the structure of the channel, e.g. multichannel, transverse or longitudinal shape, length or width, doping structure, or the overlap or alignment between the channel and the gate, the source or the drain, or the contacting structure of the channel
Definitions
- a thin film transistor whose channel region is formed from an amorphous semiconductor causes deterioration such as an increase in threshold voltage or a decrease in field-effect mobility. If deterioration in the thin film transistor proceeds, there arises a problem such that a driver circuit may have difficulty in operation and may fall to display an image. Therefore, a shift register capable of suppressing deterioration in a transistor is disclosed in Patent Document 1.
- Patent Document 1 in order to suppress degradation of transistor characteristics, two transistors are provided and the transistors are connected between an output terminal of a flip-flop and a wiring to which a low-voltage power supply potential VSS is supplied. Thus, the transistors become conducting in turn. In such a manner, a period during which each of the transistors is conducting can be shortened by approximately half in a frame period; therefore, degradation of transistor characteristics of the transistors can be suppressed to some extent.
- the first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and a second terminal of the sixth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line
- the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the sixth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to the first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the first terminal of the third thin film transistor
- a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor
- the gate of the third thin film transistor is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor
- the gate of the fourth thin film transistor is electrically connected to a fifth terminal of the tenth thin film transistor
- a gate is electrically connected to the fifth signal line.
- the first terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, and the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor
- a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line
- a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line.
- One embodiment of the invention is a driver circuit including a plurality of pulse output circuits.
- Each of the plurality of pulse output circuits includes a first thin film transistor to an eleventh thin film transistor.
- Each of the plurality of pulse output circuits is electrically connected to a first signal line to a seventh signal line, a first power supply line, a second power supply line, and a third power supply line.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line
- a second terminal is electrically connected to a gate of the third thin film transistor
- a gate of the fourth thin film transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the fifth thin film transistor
- a second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor is electrically connected to the second signal line
- a first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the third thin film transistor and a second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor
- a second terminal is electrically connected to a gate of the sixth thin film transistor and a gate of the seventh thin film transistor
- a gate is electrically connected to the third power supply line.
- the first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and a second terminal of the sixth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, a second terminal of the seventh thin flUm transistor and a first terminal of the eleventh thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and the first terminal of the fourth thin film transistor
- the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the seventh thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, the first terminal of the fifth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the eleventh thin film transistor
- the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the sixth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to the first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the first terminal of the third thin film transistor
- a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line
- the second terminal is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the fifth signal line.
- a reset signal may be supplied to the second signal line, the previous stage signal may be supplied to the fourth signal line, the next stage signal may be supplied to the fifth signal line, and a first output signal and a second output signal may respectively be output from the sixth signal line and the seventh signal line.
- a clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in odd-numbered stages and an inverted clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in odd-numbered stages.
- the inverted clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in even-numbered stages and the clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in even-numbered stages.
- the inverted clock signal may be delayed from the clock signal by half of a cycle.
- the second clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J ⁇ 2)th stage and the third clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J ⁇ 2)th stage.
- the third clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J ⁇ 1)th stage and the fourth clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J ⁇ 1)th stage.
- the fourth clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in J-th stage and the first clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in J-th stage.
- the fourth clock signal may be delayed from the third clock signal by a fourth of a cycle
- the third clock signal may be delayed from the second clock signal by a fourth of a cycle
- the second clock signal may be delayed from the first clock signal by a fourth of a cycle
- the first clock signal may be delayed from the fourth clock signal by a fourth of a cycle.
- the driver circuit may include a capacitor.
- One electrode is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, a second terminal of the thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- the other electrode is electrically connected to the second power supply line.
- the driver circuit may include a twelfth thin film transistor.
- a first terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor.
- a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line.
- a gate is electrically connected to the seventh signal line.
- the first thin film transistor to the eleventh thin film transistor may each include a microcrystalline silicon in a channel region.
- FIGS. 1A to 1D are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 2A and 2B are a circuit diagram of a driver circuit and a timing chart for an explanation of operation of the driver circuit
- FIGS. 3A and 3B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 6A and 6B are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 7A to 7C are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 9A and 9B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 12A and 12B are block diagrams of a display device
- FIGS. 18A and 18B are cross-sectional views showing a driver circuit
- FIGS. 20A to 20C are cross-sectional views showing a manufacturing method of a driver circuit
- FIGS. 21A to 21C are cross-sectional views showing a method for manufacturing a driver circuit
- FIGS. 28A and 28B are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit
- a driver circuit which functions as a shift register is described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 1D .
- a shift register 100 includes first to N-th pulse output circuits 101 _ 1 to 101 _N (N ⁇ 3) (see FIG. 1A ).
- FIG. 1D a structure of the pulse output circuit in the odd-numbered stage is described as an example. Note that a difference between the plurality of pulse output circuits in the odd-numbered stages and that in the even-numbered stages is, as described above, in the terminals to which the clock signal CK and the inverted clock signal CKB are input.
- the first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor 111 , the gate of the third thin film transistor 113 , the gate of the fourth thin film transistor 114 , the gate of the fifth thin film transistor 115 , and the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor 119 , a second terminal is connected to the second power supply line 132 , and a gate is connected to the fourth signal line 154 .
- a first terminal is connected to the sixth signal line 156 , the first terminal of the fifth thin film transistor 115 , and the second terminal of the seventh thin film transistor 117 , a second terminal is connected to the second power supply line 132 , and a gate is connected to the third signal line 153 .
- a thin film transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source.
- the thin film transistor has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and current can flow through the drain region, the channel region, and the source region.
- the source and the drain of the thin film transistor may interchange depending on the structure, the operating condition, and the like of the thin film transistor, it is difficult to define which is a source or a drain.
- a region which serves as a source or a drain is not referred to as a source or a drain in some cases.
- one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first terminal and the other may be referred to as a second terminal, for example.
- a structure where gate electrodes an formed above and below a channel region can be used. Note that the structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel region is substantially equivalent to a structure where a plurality of thin film transistors is connected in parallel.
- each of A and B is an object (e.g., a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, or a layer). Accordingly, another element may be interposed between elements having a connection relation illustrated in drawings and texts, without limitation to a predetermined connection relation, for example, the connection relation illustrated in the drawings and the texts.
- one or more circuits which enable functional connection between A and B may be connected between A and B.
- a logic circuit such as an inverter, a NAND circuit, or a NOR circuit
- a signal converter circuit such as a DA converter circuit, an AD converter circuit, or a gamma correction circuit
- a potential level converter circuit such as a power supply circuit (e.g., a dc-dc converter, a step-up dc-dc converter, or a step-down dc-dc converter) or a level shifter circuit for changing a potential level of a signal; a voltage source; a current source; a switching circuit; an amplifier circuit such as a circuit which can increase signal amplitude, the amount of current, or the like, an operational amplifier, a differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, or a buffer circuit; a signal generation circuit; a memory circuit; and/or a control circuit
- a and B may be connected between A and B.
- a logic circuit such as
- a thin film transistor in this embodiment is a thin film transistor (TFT) formed using microcrystalline (also referred to as microcrystal, nanocrystal, or semi-amorphous) silicon for a channel layer. Therefore, a driver circuit can be made in which degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed.
- TFT thin film transistor
- switches can be used as a switch.
- an electrical switch, a mechanical switch, or the like can be used. That is, any element can be used as long as it can control a current flow, without limitation to a certain element.
- a transistor e.g., a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor
- a diode e.g., a PN diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, an MIM (metal insulator metal) diode, an MIS (metal insulator semiconductor) diode, or a diode-connected transistor
- a logic circuit in which such elements are combined can be used as a switch.
- FIGS. 1A to 1D operation of a shift register shown in FIGS. 1A to 1D is described with reference to FIGS. 2A and 2B , FIGS. 3A and 3B , FIGS. 4A and 48 , FIGS. 5A and 5B , and FIGS. 6A and 6B .
- a connection node of the second terminal of the second thin film transistor 112 , the gate of the sixth thin film transistor 116 , and the gate of the seventh thin film transistor 117 is a node A.
- a first period T 1 , a second period T 2 , a third period T 3 , a fourth period T 4 , and a fifth period T 5 which are shown in a timing chart in FIG. 2B , are separately explained.
- the first to eleventh thin film transistors 111 to 121 are N-channel thin film transistors and are in a conduction state when a gate-source voltage Vgs exceeds a threshold voltage (Vth). Also note that in FIG.
- the first to eleventh thin film transistors 111 to 121 serve as a shift register included in a gate driver, and a period 201 is a vertical retrace period and a period 202 is a gate selection period.
- the timing chart in FIG. 28 shows a specific example of the waveforms of the clock signal CK, the inverted clock signal CKB, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, the next stage signal Rin, and second output signal SRout of each of the stages (e.g., SRout 1 of the first stage).
- a high power supply potential level and a low power supply potential level of each of the signals are respectively VDD and VSS, except the node A.
- a first output signal Gout 1 is omitted because it has a wave form same as the second output signal SRout 1 .
- the first period T 1 is a period for reset of a potential of each of the wirings (i.e., for setting a potential at VSS) in the pulse output circuit.
- the second output signal SRout 1 is an L-level signal.
- each of the thin film transistors can be set at a potential of VDD or VSS. Therefore, a so-called dynamic circuit in this embodiment, which is driven with the use of a node in a floating state, each node can be reset, whereby the level of noise immunity and operation reliability can be improved to be equal to that of a static circuit.
- the node A uses the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 as the source; therefore, a potential of the node A becomes a value VDD ⁇ Vth where a value of a threshold voltage Vth of the eighth thin film transistor 118 is subtracted from a value of a potential of the first power supply line 131 .
- the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 has the value VDD ⁇ Vth, the thin film transistor 118 is non-conducting and the node A is in a floating state while maintaining the value VDD-Vth. Note that as shown in FIG.
- the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are conducting, but at the same time, since the potential of the first signal line 151 is VSS, a potential of each of the wirings in the second period T 2 is determined as in FIG. 2B . That is, the second period T 2 is a period where the node A in the pulse output circuit is in a floating state. In addition, in the second period T 2 , the second output signal SRout 1 is an L-level signal.
- the clock signal CK becomes an H-level signal.
- the inverted clock signal CKB, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals.
- the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are conducting, that is, the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are in a state where current flows between a source and a drain (as shown by a dotted arrow in FIG. 4A ), and a potential of each second terminal (the source side) of the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 starts to increase.
- the second thin film transistor 112 is provided so as to be connected, through the first terminal and the second terminal thereof, between the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 and the gate of the sixth thin film transistor 116 , or between the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 and the gate of the seventh thin film transistor 117 .
- the second thin film transistor 112 since the high-voltage power supply potential VDD is applied to the gate of the second thin film transistor 112 , the second thin film transistor 112 is conducting in almost all the periods without application of a large amount of voltage between the gate and a source thereof. Therefore, when channel region of the thin film transistor is formed using an amorphous semiconductor, deterioration in the thin film transistor becomes pronounced, on the other hand, progress in deterioration can further be restrained with the use of microcrystalline silicon, which is a typical example of a microcrystalline semiconductor described in this embodiment, for channel regions of each transistor. Note that with a multi-gate structure where two or more gate electrodes are provided, the second thin film transistor 112 can be redundant, thus, progress in the deterioration can further be restrained.
- FIG. 28A shows an example of the structure where the gate of the second thin film transistor 112 is connected to a third power supply line 2801 to which a conduction holding potential VCC which brings the second thin film transistor 112 into conduction is applied and which is provided aside from the first power supply line 131 to which the high-voltage power supply potential VDD is applied.
- the conduction holding potential VCC is in a magnitude relation as follows: VSS ⁇ VCC ⁇ VDD, and progress in deterioration in the second thin film transistor 112 can further be restrained in a manner that the conduction holding potential VCC is made smaller in value than the high-voltage power supply potential VDD.
- the seventh signal line 157 (or the sixth signal line 156 ) supplies an H-level signal
- the next stage signal Rin (SRout_ 2 in FIG. 2B ) obtained from the pulse output circuit in the second stage becomes an H-level signal, and the ninth thin film transistor 119 whose gate is connected to the fifth signal line 155 is thus conducting.
- the inverted clock signal CKB is an H-level signal
- the clock signal CK, the reset signal RES, and the previous stage signal Lin are L-level signals.
- the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , the fifth thin film transistor 115 , and the eleventh thin film transistor 121 are conducting.
- the first thin film transistor 111 , the eighth thin film transistor 111 , the ninth thin film transistor 119 , and the tenth thin film transistor 120 are non-conducting, and the gates of the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 are kept in a floating state as well as in the fourth period. That is, the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state.
- the second thin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T 4 , and the gates of the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are set at VSS; thus, the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Furthermore, the eleventh thin film transistor 121 is conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIC SA, and a potential of each of the wirings in the period T 5 - 1 is determined as shown in FIG. SA.
- the inverted clock signal CKB is an H-level signal
- the clock signal CK, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals.
- the second thin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T 4 , and each gate of the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are set at VSS; thus, the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Furthermore, the eleventh thin film transistor 121 is conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIG. 5B , and the potentials of the wirings in the period T 5 - 2 are determined as shown in FIG. 2B . That is, in the fifth period T 5 , the first output signal Gout 1 and the second output signal SRout 1 are output as L-level signals.
- a structure can be alternatively used where a capacitor 2901 is added to the structure shown in FIG. 1D (see FIG. 29 ).
- the capacitor 2901 one electrode is connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor 111 , the gate of the third thin film transistor 113 , the gate of the fourth thin film transistor 114 , the gate of the fifth thin film transistor 115 , the second terminal of the thin film transistor 119 , and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor 120 ; and the other electrode is connected to the second power supply line 132 .
- An n-channel thin film transistor has higher field-effect mobility than a p-channel thin film transistor. Therefore, in this embodiment, a structure of an n-channel thin film transistor is described.
- FIG. 17 shows a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the thin film transistor.
- the thin film transistor shown in FIG. 17 has, over a substrate 1101 , a gate electrode 1103 , a microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a , a mixed layer 1115 b , a layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, a gate insulating layer 1105 provided between the gate electrode 1103 and the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a , impurity semiconductor layers 1127 serving as a source region and a drain region which are in contact with the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, and wirings 1125 which are in contact with the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 .
- a glass substrate, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate with heat resistance which can withstand process temperature in manufacturing steps, or the like can be used.
- a substrate in which an insulating layer is provided on a surface of a substrate of a metal such as a stainless steel alloy may be used.
- a glass substrate for example, an alkali-free glass substrate formed using barium borosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, aluminosilicate glass, or the like may be used.
- the following structures are preferable: a two-layer structure of an aluminum layer and a molybdenum layer stacked thereover, a two-layer structure of a copper layer and a molybdenum layer stacked thereover, a two-layer structure of a copper layer and a titanium nitride layer or a tantalum nitride layer stacked thereover, and a two-layer structure of a titanium nitride layer and a molybdenum layer.
- a stack of a tungsten layer or a tungsten nitride layer, a layer of an alloy of aluminum and silicon or an alloy of aluminum and titanium, and a titanium nitride layer or a titanium layer is preferable.
- a metal layer functioning as a barrier layer is stacked over a layer with low electric resistance, electric resistance can be lowered and diffusion of a metal element from the metal layer into the semiconductor layer can be prevented.
- a nitride layer of any of the metal materials described above may be provided between the gate electrode 1103 and the substrate 1101 .
- the gate insulating layer 1105 can be a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, or a silicon nitride oxide layer by CVD, sputtering, or the like.
- silicon oxynitride refers to a material which contains more oxygen than nitrogen, and in the case where measurement is performed using Rutherford backscattering spectrometry (RBS) and hydrogen forward scattering (HFS), silicon oxynitride includes oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, and hydrogen as composition ranging from 50 to 70 atomic %, 0.5 to 15 atomic %, 25 to 35 atomic %, and 0.1 to 10 atomic %, respectively.
- silicon nitride oxide refers to a material which contains more nitrogen than oxygen
- silicon nitride oxide preferably includes oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, and hydrogen as composition ranging from 5 to 30 atomic %, 20 to 55 atomic %, 25 to 35 atomic %, and 10 to 30 atomic %, respectively.
- percentages of nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, and hydrogen fall within the ranges given above if the total number of atoms contained in silicon oxynitride or silicon nitride oxide is defined as 100 atomic %.
- a microcrystalline semiconductor included in the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a is a semiconductor having an intermediate structure between amorphous and crystalline structures (including single crystal and polycrystal).
- a microcrystalline semiconductor is a semiconductor having a third state that is stable in terms of free energy and is a crystalline semiconductor having short-range order and lattice distortion, in which columnar or needle-like crystals having a grain size of from 2 to 200 nm, preferably 10 to 80 nm, more preferably 20 to 50 nm have grown in a direction normal to the substrate surface. Therefore, a crystal grain boundary is formed at the interface of the columnar or needle-like crystals in some cases.
- microcrystalline silicon which is a typical example of a microcrystalline semiconductor, shifts to a lower wavenumber side than 520 cm ⁇ 1 which represents single crystal silicon. That is, the peak of the Raman spectrum of microcrystalline silicon is between 520 cm ⁇ 1 which represents single crystal silicon and 480 cm ⁇ 1 which represents amorphous silicon.
- microcrystalline silicon contains hydrogen or halogen at a concentration of at least 1 atomic % to terminate a dangling bond.
- microcrystalline silicon contains a rare gas element such as helium, argon, krypton, or neon to further promote lattice distortion, so that stability is increased and a favorable microcrystalline semiconductor can be obtained.
- a microcrystalline semiconductor is disclosed in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,409,134.
- the concentration of oxygen and nitrogen contained in the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry be less than 1 ⁇ 10 18 atoms/cm 3 because the crystallinity of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 115 a can be improved.
- a semiconductor layer which has lower energy at an urbach edge measured by constant photocurrent method (CPM) or photoluminescence spectroscopy and a smaller amount of absorption spectra of defects than a conventional amorphous semiconductor layer, is referred to as the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor.
- amorphous silicon is a typical example of an amorphous semiconductor in the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor.
- the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor may include nitrogen or an NH group.
- FIGS. 18A and 18B each show an enlarged view of a region between the gate insulating layer 1105 and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 functioning as a source or drain region in FIG. 17 . Particularly, the mixed layer 1115 b will be described in detail.
- the mixed layer 1115 b is provided between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor.
- the mixed layer 1115 b includes microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and amorphous semiconductor region 1108 b filling the space except the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a .
- the mixed layer 1115 b includes the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a which protrudes from the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and the amorphous semiconductor region 1108 b which is formed using a similar kind of semiconductor as the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor.
- the amorphous semiconductor region 1108 b included in the mixed layer 1115 b may include semiconductor crystal grains having a grain size from 1 nm to 10 nm, preferably, from 1 nm to 5 nm.
- the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a are formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor and each have a conical or pyramidal shape or a projecting shape with a tip that narrows from the gate insulating layer 1105 to the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. Note that the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a may each have a conical or pyramidal shape or a projecting shape with a tip that widens from the gate insulating layer 1105 to the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor.
- the mixed layer 1115 b in the case where each of the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a have a projecting shape with a tip that narrows from the gate insulating layer 1105 to the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, the mixed layer 1115 b on the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a side accounts for a larger microcrystalline semiconductor region than the mixed layer 1115 b on the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor side.
- microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a grow in a thickness direction on a surface of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a , when a gas whose source gas contains nitrogen is added, or when a flow ratio of hydrogen to silane is reduced to less than that in the deposition condition of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer and a gas whose source gas contains nitrogen is added as well, crystal growth of the semiconductor crystal grains in the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a is restrained, and the semiconductor crystal grains come to have a conical or pyramidal shape, and an amorphous semiconductor are eventually deposited.
- the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a serving as a channel region, and providing, between the channel region and the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 serving as a source region and a drain region, the mixed layer 1115 b including the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a having a conical or pyramidal shape, and the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor formed using a well-ordered semiconductor layer which has fewer defects and whose tail slope of a level at a band edge in the valence band is steep, it is possible to reduce off-state-current of the thin film transistor and increase on-state-current and field-effect mobility.
- the mixed layer 1115 b is provided between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 , and the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not formed between the mixed layer 1115 b and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 .
- the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a account for smaller region than the amorphous semiconductor region 1108 b . In this manner, off-state-current of the thin film transistor can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce resistance in the vertical direction (the thickness direction) in the mixed layer 1115 b and resistance between a source region and a drain region, and to increase on-state-current of the thin film transistor.
- the mixed layer 1115 b preferably includes nitrogen, for a typical example, an NH group or an NH 2 group. This is because defects are reduced when nitrogen, for a typical example, an NH group or an NH 2 group is bonded with dangling bonds of silicon atoms at the interface between semiconductor crystal grains included in the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and at the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and the amorphous semiconductor region 1108 b . Accordingly, by setting the concentration of nitrogen at 1 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 21 cm ⁇ 3 , the dangling bonds of silicon atoms can be easily cross-linked with nitrogen, preferably an NH group, so that carriers can flow easily.
- the dangling bonds of the semiconductor atoms at the aforementioned interfaces are terminated with the NH 2 group, so that the defect level disappears.
- resistance in the vertical direction (the film thickness direction) at the time of the application of voltage between the source electrode and drain electrode of the thin film transistor which is in an on state is reduced. That is, field-effect mobility and on current of the thin film transistor are increased.
- the defects which interfere with the carrier transfer can be reduced by a reduction in oxygen concentration in the mixed layer 1115 b.
- the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a refers to a region having approximately uniform thickness.
- the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and the mixed layer 111 b refers to a region where the region closest to the gate insulating layer 1105 is extended in a plain portion of the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and the microcrystalline semiconductor region 1108 b.
- the total thickness of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and the mixed layer 1115 b is from 3 nm to 80 nm, preferably from 5 nm to 30 nm, whereby off-state-current of the TFT can be reduced.
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 is formed using microcrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added or microcrystalline silicon to which boron is added, characteristics of the interface can be improved by a formation of a microcrystalline semiconductor layer, for a typical example, a microcrystalline silicon layer between the mixed layer 1115 b and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 or between the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 . In such a manner, it is possible to reduce resistance at the interface between the mixed layer 1115 b and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 or between the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 .
- the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 is formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor which is similar to the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a described in Embodiment 1.
- the second microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b can be formed in a manner similar to the microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a included in the mixed layer 1115 b described in Embodiment 1.
- metal oxide layers metal nitride layers, metal oxynitride layers, metal nitride oxide layers, or the like can be used.
- the metal refers to any of the metal elements in the description of the wirings 1125 .
- a shift register 700 includes first to J-th pulse output circuits 701 _ 1 to 701 _J (J is preferably a multiple of 4, which is 4 or more) (see FIG. 7A ).
- the first clock signal CK 1 to the fourth clock signal CK 4 sequentially deviate (are sequentially delayed) by a fourth of a cycle.
- a (J ⁇ 2)th clock signal CK 2 is advanced from a (J ⁇ 3)th clock signal CK 1 by a fourth of a cycle
- a (J ⁇ 1)th clock signal CK 3 is advanced from the (J ⁇ 2)th clock signal CK 2 by a fourth of a cycle
- a J-th clock signal CK 4 is advanced from the (J ⁇ 1)th clock signal CK 3 by a fourth of a cycle
- the J-th clock signal CK 4 is advanced from the (J ⁇ 3)th clock signal by a fourth of a cycle.
- a clock signal CK_N (in this case, N is 2) is input to a first terminal; the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal; any of the first to fourth clock signals (in this case, CK 3 ) which is different from the clock signal input to the first terminal is input to a third terminal; the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal; the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal; the first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal; and the second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal.
- a clock signal CK_N (in this case, N is 4) is input to a first terminal; the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal; any of the first to fourth clock signals (in this case, CK 4 ) which is different from the clock signal input to the first terminal is input to a third terminal; the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal; the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal; the first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal; and the second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal.
- the first clock signal CK 1 to the fourth clock signal CK 4 become H-level signals (high power supply potential level) and L-level signals (low power supply potential level) repeatedly at a regular interval.
- FIGS. 8A and 8B operation of the shift register shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C is described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B , FIGS. 9A and 9B , FIGS. 10A and 10B , FIGS. 11A and 11B .
- a connection node of the second terminal of the second thin film transistor 112 , the gate of the sixth thin film transistor 116 , and the gate of the seventh thin film transistor 117 is denoted by a node A in a manner similar to that in Embodiment 1.
- a first period T 1 , a second period T 2 , a third period T 3 , a fourth period T 4 , and a fifth period T 5 which are shown in a timing chart in FIG. 8B , are separately used for explanation.
- the first to eleventh thin film transistors 111 to 121 are N-channel thin film transistors and are in a conduction state when voltage (Vgs) between the gate and the source exceeds a threshold voltage (Vth). Note that in FIG.
- the first to eleventh thin film transistors 111 to 121 used for a shift register included in a gate driver and a period 201 is a vertical retrace period and a period 202 is a gate selection period.
- a period 201 is a vertical retrace period and a period 202 is a gate selection period.
- FIG. 8B shows specific examples of the waveforms of the first clock signal CK 1 , the second clock signal CK 2 , the third clock signal CK 3 , the fourth clock signal CK 4 , the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, the next stage signal Rin, and the second output signal SRout of each stage (e.g., SRout 1 of the first stage).
- the high power supply potential level and the low power supply potential level of each signal are VDD and VSS, respectively.
- a first output signal Gout 1 is omitted here because it has a waveform which is the same as that of the second output signal SRout 1 .
- the reset signal RES becomes an H-level signal and the first thin film transistor 111 whose gate is connected to the second signal line 152 is conducting.
- the second clock signal CK 2 , the first clock signal CK 1 , the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals.
- the second thin film transistor 112 , the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 are conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIG. 9A , and the potential of each wiring in the first period T 1 is determined as shown in FIG. 8B . That is, the first period T 1 is a period during which the potential of each wiring in the pulse output circuit is reset (to VSS). In addition, in the first period T 1 , an L-level signal is output as the second output signal SRout.
- the previous stage signal Lin is an H-level signal
- the eighth thin film transistor 118 and the tenth thin film transistor 120 whose gates are each connected to the fourth signal line 154 are thus conducting.
- the first clock signal CK 1 , the second clock signal CK 2 , the reset signal RES, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals.
- the eighth thin film transistor 118 is conducting, as illustrated in FIG. 9B .
- the second thin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the first period 71 , and a current flows, as shown by a dotted arrow in FIG. 9B .
- the node A uses the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 as the source; therefore, a potential of the node A becomes a value VDD-Vth obtained by subtraction of the threshold voltage Vth of the eighth thin film transistor 118 from a value of a potential of the first power supply line 131 .
- the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 is VDD-Vth
- the thin film transistor 118 are non-conducting and the node A enters into a floating state while maintaining VDD-Vth. Note that as shown in FIG. 9B , since the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are conducting, and since the first signal line 151 is VSS, the potential of each wiring in the second period T 2 is determined as in FIG.
- an H-level signal is output as the second output signal SRout 1 in the third period T 3 , that is, a potential of the node A in a floating state is raised by the bootstrap operation and the first output signal Gout 1 and the second output signal SRout 1 are output as H-level signals. Then, the second output signal SRout 1 is input as the previous stage signal Lin in the pulse output circuit in the second stage.
- the second thin film transistor 112 With the second thin film transistor 112 whose gate is supplied with high-voltage power supply potential VDD, the potential of the node A is raised by bootstrap operation, but at the same time, an increase in the potential of the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor 118 can be prevented. In other words, with the second thin film transistor 112 , the level of a negative bias voltage applied between a gate and a source of the eighth thin film transistor 118 can be lowered. Accordingly, with the circuit structure in this embodiment, the level of a negative bias voltage applied between a gate and a source of the thin film transistor can be lowered, so that deterioration in the eighth thin film transistor 118 , which is due to stress, can further be suppressed.
- the second thin film transistor 112 may be connected to the third power supply line 2801 to which conduction holding potential VCC shown in FIC. 28 A is supplied in a manner similar to that of Embodiment 1.
- a twelfth thin film transistor 2802 shown in FIG. 28B may be provided
- the next stage signal Rin (SRout_ 2 in FIG. 2B ) obtained from the pulse output circuit in the second stage becomes an H-level signal, and the ninth thin film transistor 119 whose gate is connected to the fifth signal line 155 is thus conducting.
- the second clock signal CK 2 is an H-level signal
- the first clock signal CK 1 , the reset signal RES, and the previous stage signal Lin are L-level signals.
- the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , the fifth thin film transistor 115 , and the eleventh thin film transistor 121 are conducting.
- the second thin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the third period T 3 , and each gate of the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 is set at VSS; thus, the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIG. 10B , and the potential of each wiring in the fourth period T 4 is thus determined as in FIG. 8B . That is, in the fourth period T 4 , the first output signal Gout 1 and the second output signal SRout 1 are L-level signals.
- a signal used for the eleventh thin film transistor 121 to be conducting (in this case, the second clock signal CK 2 ) is supplied, so that a potential of the sixth signal line 156 which outputs Gout falls rapidly. Therefore, a driver circuit with fewer malfunction can be obtained. Further, since the load on the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce deterioration in the thin film transistors. Note that as shown in FIG.
- the eleventh thin film transistor 121 is formed using a plurality of eleventh thin film transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ 3 , and clock signals different from clock signals supplied to the first signal line 151 (in this case, the second clock signal CK 2 , the third clock signal CK 3 , and the fourth clock signal CK 4 ) are supplied from third signal lines 153 _ 1 to 153 _ 3 to the eleventh thin film transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ 3 . Further, the eleventh thin film transistors 121 _ 1 to 121 _ 3 are controlled to be conducting or not to be conducting and the load on the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce deterioration in the thin film transistors.
- the first thin film transistor 111 , the eighth thin film transistor 118 , the ninth thin film transistor 119 , and the tenth thin film transistor 120 are non-conducting, and the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 enter into a floating state while maintaining the same gate potentials as in the fourth period. That is, the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state.
- the first clock signal CK 1 is an H-level signal or an L-level signal
- the third clock signal CK 3 is an H-level signal
- the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals.
- the first thin film transistor 111 , the eighth thin film transistor 118 , the ninth thin film transistor 119 , and the tenth thin film transistor 120 are non-conducting; thus, the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 enter into a floating state while maintaining the same gate potentials as in the fourth period.
- the third thin film transistor 113 , the fourth thin film transistor 114 , and the fifth thin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state.
- the second thin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T 4 , and gate potential of each of the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 is set at VSS; thus, the sixth thin film transistor 116 and the seventh thin film transistor 117 is non-conducting.
- the eleventh thin film transistor 121 is conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIG. 11B , and the potential of each wiring in the period T 5 - 2 is determined as shown in FIG. 8B . That is, in the fifth period T 5 , L-level signals are output as the first output signal Gout 1 and the second output signal SRout 1 .
- a display element examples of a display element, a display device which is a device having a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device which is a device having a light-emitting element are described.
- a display element, a display device which is a device having a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device which is a device having a light-emitting element can employ a variety of types and can include a variety of elements.
- a display medium whose contrast, luminance, reflectivity, transmittance, or the like is changed by electromagnetic action, such as an EL (electroluminescent) element (e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element), an LED (e.g., a white LED, a red LED, a green LED, or a blue LED), a transistor which emits light depending on the amount of current), an electron emitter, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, a grating light valve (GLV), a plasma display panel (PDP), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, or a carbon nanotube can be used as a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device.
- an EL electroluminescent
- an EL element electroluminescent element
- an LED e.g., a white LED,
- display devices having EL elements include an EL display; display devices having electron emitters include a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: surface-conduction electron-emitter display), and the like; display devices having liquid crystal elements include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a transflective liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display); and display devices having electronic ink include electronic paper.
- display devices having electron emitters include a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: surface-conduction electron-emitter display), and the like
- display devices having liquid crystal elements include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a transflective liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display)
- display devices having electronic ink include electronic paper.
- the liquid crystal display device includes a circuit 5361 , a source driver 5362 , a gate driver 5363 _ 1 , a gate driver 5363 _ 2 , a pixel portion 5364 , a circuit 5365 , and a lighting device 5366 .
- a plurality of wirings 5371 which are extended from the source driver 5362 and a plurality of wirings 5372 which are extended from the gate drivers 5363 _ 1 and 5363 _ 2 are provided in the pixel portion 5364 .
- pixels 5367 which include display elements such as liquid crystal elements are provided in a matrix in respective regions where the plurality of wirings 5371 and the plurality of wirings 5372 is provided in matrix.
- the circuit 5361 has a function of supplying a signal, voltage, current, or the like to the source driver 5362 , the gate driver 5363 _ 1 , the gate driver 5363 _ 2 , and the circuit 5365 in response to a video signal 5360 and functions as a controller, a control circuit, a timing generator, a power supply circuit, a regulator, or the like.
- the circuit 5361 supplies a signal line driver circuit start signal (SSP), a signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK), a signal line driver circuit inverted clock signal (SCKB), video signal data (DATA), or a latch signal (LAT) to the source driver 5362 .
- SSP signal line driver circuit start signal
- SCK signal line driver circuit clock signal
- SCKB signal line driver circuit inverted clock signal
- DATA video signal data
- LAT latch signal
- the circuit 5361 b often includes a circuit which is preferably formed using a MOS transistor with high field-effect mobility and few variations (e.g., a shift register, a timing generator, an oscillator, a regulator, or an analog buffer).
- a MOS transistor with high field-effect mobility and few variations e.g., a shift register, a timing generator, an oscillator, a regulator, or an analog buffer.
- the first terminal of the thin film transistor 603 _ 1 is connected to the wiring 605 _ 1 ; a second terminal of the thin film transistor 603 _ 1 is connected to the wiring S 1 ; and the gate of the thin film transistor 603 _ 1 is connected to the wiring 604 _ 1 .
- one gate selection period is divided into a period T 0 and a period T 1 to a period Tk.
- the period T 0 is a period during which a precharge voltage is simultaneously applied to pixels in a selected row, and can be a precharge period.
- Each of the periods T 1 to Tk is a period during which video signals are written to pixels in a selected row, and can be a write period.
- the circuit 600 outputs an H-level signal to the wiring 604 _ 1 .
- the thin film transistor 6031 has electrical continuity between the source and the drain, whereby the wiring 605 _ 1 and the wiring S 1 are conducting. Moreover, the wiring 605 _ 1 and the wirings S 2 to Sk are non-conducting.
- the circuit 601 outputs a signal Data (S 1 ) to the wiring 605 _ 1
- the signal Data (S 1 ) is output to the wiring S 1 through the thin film transistors 603 _ 1 . In this manner, the signal Data (S 1 ) is written to, among pixels connected to the wiring S 1 , pixels in the selected row.
- n sub-pixels also referred to as subpixels
- k n is a natural number
- one gate selection period is divided into the period T 0 , the period T 1 , and the period T 2 .
- a video signal can be written to one of the two sub-pixels in the period T 1
- a video signal can be written to the other of the two sub-pixels in the period T 2 .
- the wiring 5431 functions as a signal line, a video signal line, or a source line.
- the wiring 5432 functions as a signal line, a scan line, or a gate line.
- the wiring 5433 functions as a power supply line or a capacitor line.
- the electrode 5434 functions as a common electrode or a counter electrode.
- the electrode 5434 functions as a common electrode or a counter electrode.
- this embodiment is not limited to this. In the case where voltage is supplied to the wiring 5431 and the wiring 5432 , these wirings function as power supply lines.
- the wiring 5433 functions as a signal line.
- the signal 5442 _ j , the signal 5442 _ j +1, the signal 5441 _ i , the signal 5441 _ i +1, and the voltage 5442 are examples of a signal input to the wiring 5432 in a J-th row, a signal input to the wiring 5432 in a (j+1)th row, a signal input to the wiring 5431 in an i-th column, a signal input to the wiring 5431 in an (i+1)th column, and a voltage supplied to the wiring 5432 , respectively.
- FIG. 15B shows an example of the case where a positive signal and a negative signal are alternately input to the wiring 5431 every selection period.
- a positive signal is a signal whose potential is higher than a reference value (e.g., a potential of the electrode 5434 ).
- a negative signal is a signal whose potential is lower than a reference value (e.g., a potential of the electrode 5434 ).
- this embodiment is not limited to this, and signals with the same polarity can be input to the wiring 5431 in one frame period.
- FIG. 15B shows an example of the case where the polarity of the signal 5441 _ i and the polarity of the signal 5441 _ i +1 are different from each other.
- this embodiment is not limited to this.
- the polarity of the signal 5441 _ i and the polarity of the signal 5441 _ i +1 can be the same.
- FIG. 15B shows an example of the case where a period during which the signal 5442 _ j is at the H level and a period during which the signal 5442 _ j+ 1 is at the H level do not overlap with each other.
- this embodiment is not limited to this.
- the period during which the signal 5442 _ j is at the H level and the period during which the signal 5442 _ j +1 is at the H level can overlap with each other.
- signals of the same polarity are preferably supplied to the wiring 5431 in one frame period. In this manner, pixels in a (j+1)th row can be precharged by using the signal 5441 _ j written to pixels in the j-th row.
- a writing time of a video signal to a pixel can be shortened. Therefore, a high-definition display device can be obtained. Alternatively, a display portion of the display device can be made large. Alternatively, since the signals of the same polarity are input to the wiring 5431 in one frame period, power consumption can be reduced.
- a pixel 5420 ( i,j ) is connected to a wiring 5431 _ i .
- a pixel 5420 ( i, j+ 1) is connected to a wiring 5431 _ i +1. That is, pixels in the i-th column are alternately connected to the wiring 5431 _ i and the wiring 5431 _ i +1 row-by-row.
- the pixel in this embodiment by a combination of the pixel in this embodiment and any of the structures described in Embodiments 1 to 4, a variety of advantages can be obtained.
- the number of signals required for driving a display device is increased. Therefore, the number of gate lines or source lines is increased. As a result, the number of connections between a substrate over which a pixel portion is formed and an external circuit is greatly increased in some cases.
- a scan line driver circuit and the pixel portion can be formed over the same substrate, as described in Embodiment 3.
- the gate electrode 1103 can be formed in such a manner that a conductive layer is formed over the substrate 1101 with the use of the material described in Embodiment 1 by sputtering or vacuum evaporation; a mask is formed over the conductive layer by a photolithography technique, an inkjet method, or the like; and the conductive layer is etched with the use of the mask.
- the gate electrode 1103 can be formed in a manner that a conductive nanopaste of silver, gold, copper, or the like is deposited over the substrate by an inkjet method and the conductive nanopaste is baked.
- the gate electrode 1103 is formed in a way that a conductive layer is formed over the substrate 1101 and the conductive layer is etched with a resist mask formed with the use of a photomask.
- a gate wiring (a scan line) and a capacitor wiring can also be formed concurrently.
- a scan line refers to a wiring for selecting a pixel
- a capacitor wiring refers to a wiring which is connected to one of electrodes of a capacitor in a pixel.
- this embodiment is not limited to this.
- the gate electrode 1103 and either one or both a gate wiring and a capacitor wiring may be formed separately.
- the gate insulating layer 1105 can be formed using the material described in Embodiment 1 by CVD, sputtering, or the like.
- the gate insulating layer 1105 may be formed using a microwave plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus with a high frequency (1 GHz or higher).
- a microwave plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus When the gate insulating layer 1105 is formed by a microwave plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus, withstand voltage between a gate electrode and each of a drain electrode and a source electrode can be improved. Thus, a highly reliable thin film transistor can be obtained.
- the crystallinity of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer which is formed later can be improved and the on-state-current and the field-effect mobility of the thin film transistor can be increased.
- a compound containing silicon such as tetraethyl orthosilicate tetraethoxysilane (TEOS) (chemical formula: Si(OC 2 H 5 ) 4 ), tetramethylsilane (TMS) (chemical formula: Si(CH 3 ) 4 ), tetramethylcyclotetrasiloxane (TMCTS), octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane (OMCTS), hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS), triethoxysilane (SiH(OC 2 H 5 ) 3 ), or trisdimethylaminosilane (SiH(N(CH 3 ) 2 ) 3 ), can be used.
- TEOS tetraethyl orthosilicate tetraethoxysilane
- TMS tetramethylsilane
- TMS tetramethylcyclotetrasiloxane
- OCTS octamethylcyclotetrasi
- the first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium and hydrogen in a treatment chamber of a plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus.
- the first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium, hydrogen, and a rare gas such as helium, neon, or krypton.
- Microcrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon germanium, microcrystalline germanium, or the like is formed using a mixture of the deposition gas containing silicon or germanium and hydrogen, which is obtained by diluting the deposition gas with hydrogen whose flow rate is 10 to 2000 times, preferably 50 to 200 times as high as that of the deposition gas.
- a rare gas such as helium, argon, neon, krypton, or xenon is used as a source gas for the first semiconductor layer 1106 , whereby the deposition rate of the first semiconductor layer 1106 can be increased.
- the deposition rate is increased, the amount of impurities mixed in the first semiconductor layer 1106 is reduced; thus, the crystallinity of the first semiconductor layer 1106 can be improved. Accordingly, the on-state-current and field-effect mobility of the thin film transistor can be increased and productivity of the thin film transistor can also be increased.
- glow discharge plasma is generated by application of a high frequency power of 3 to 30 MHz, typically, a high frequency power of 13.56 MHz or 27.12 MHz in the HF band, or a high frequency power of approximately 30 to 300 MHz in the VHF band, typically 60 MHz.
- glow discharge plasma is generated by applying high frequency power of a microwave of 1 GHz or higher.
- high frequency power in the VHF band or at a microwave frequency With the use of high frequency power in the VHF band or at a microwave frequency, the deposition rate can be increased.
- high frequency power in the HF band is superimposed with high frequency power in the VHF band, whereby unevenness of plasma in a large-sized substrate is also reduced, the uniformity can be increased, and the deposition rate can be increased.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium, hydrogen, and a gas containing nitrogen in a treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus.
- a gas containing nitrogen there are ammonia, nitrogen, nitrogen fluoride, nitrogen chloride, and the like.
- a condition for forming a microcrystalline semiconductor layer is used for the flow rate ratio of the deposition gas including silicon or germanium to hydrogen in a manner similar to formation of the first semiconductor layer 1106 , and in addition, the gas including nitrogen is used for a source gas, whereby crystal growth can be reduced as compared with the case of forming the first semiconductor layer 1106 .
- the mixed layer 1107 b and the layer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor which is formed with a semiconductor layer having a small number of defects and a steep tail slope of a level at a band edge in the valence band, can be formed in the second semiconductor layer 1107 .
- the first semiconductor layer 1106 serves as a seed crystal and a microcrystalline semiconductor layer is deposited over the entire area over the first semiconductor layer 1106 (an early stage of deposition).
- a gas containing nitrogen is included in the source gas, crystal growth is partially suppressed and conical or pyramidal microcrystalline semiconductor region is formed and an amorphous semiconductor region is formed (a middle stage of the deposition). Further, crystal growth of the conical or pyramidal microcrystalline semiconductor region stops and a layer including an amorphous semiconductor is formed (a later stage of the deposition).
- the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a illustrated in FIG. 17 and FIGS. 19A and 18B corresponds to the first semiconductor layer 1106 in FIG. 20A and a microcrystalline semiconductor layer which is formed in the early stage of deposition of the second semiconductor layer 1107 , i.e., the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a in FIG. 20B .
- the mixed layers 1115 b illustrated in FIG. 17 and FIGS. 18A and 18B correspond to a layer which includes the conical or pyramidal microcrystalline semiconductor regions and regions filling the space except the conical or pyramidal microcrystalline regions and is formed in a middle stage of deposition of the second semiconductor layer 1107 in FIG. 20B , i.e., the mixed layer 1107 b.
- the nitrogen concentration which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry has a peak in the vicinity of the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and the mixed layer 1107 b and is constant in a direction in which the mixed layer 1107 b and the layer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor are deposited.
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1109 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon, hydrogen, and phosphine (diluted with hydrogen or silane) in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus.
- Amorphous silicon to which phosphorus is added or microcrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added is formed by diluting the deposition gas including silicon with hydrogen.
- the second resist mask 1113 is formed by a photolithography process.
- the second resist mask 1113 has regions with different thicknesses.
- Such a resist mask can be formed using a multi-tone mask.
- the multi-tone mask can be used in a step of forming a pattern of the second semiconductor layer 1107 and a step of separating the semiconductor layer into a source region and a drain region.
- the gray-tone mask 1180 shown in FIG. 22A-1 includes a light-blocking portion 1182 formed using a light-blocking layer on a light-transmitting substrate 1181 , and a diffraction grating portion 1183 provided with a pattern of the light-blocking layer.
- the diffraction grating portion 1183 has slits, dots, meshes, or the like provided at intervals which are less than or equal to the resolution limit of light used for exposure, so that light transmittance is controlled. Note that the slits, dots, or meshes provided at the diffraction grating portion 1183 may be provided periodically or non-periodically.
- the light-transmitting substrate 1181 quartz or the like can be used.
- the light-blocking layer included in the light-blocking portion 182 and the diffraction grating portion 1183 is formed using chromium, chromium oxide, or the like.
- transmittance in a region overlapping with the light-blocking portion 1182 is 0%, and transmittance in a region where the light-blocking portion 1182 or the diffraction grating portion 183 is not provided is 100%.
- transmittance at the diffraction grating portion 1183 is approximately in the range of 10 to 70%, which can be adjusted by the interval of slits, dots, or meshes of the diffraction grating, or the like.
- the half-tone mask 1185 shown in FIG. 22B-1 includes a semi-light-transmitting portion 1187 formed using a semi-light-transmitting layer on a light-transmitting substrate 1186 , and a light-blocking portion 1188 formed using a light-blocking layer.
- the semi-light-transmitting portion 1187 can be formed using a layer of MoSiN, MoSi, MoSiO, MoSiON, CrSi, or the like.
- the light-blocking portion 1188 may be formed using a metal which is similar to that of the light-blocking layer of the gray-tone mask, and is preferably formed using chromium, chromium oxide, or the like.
- transmittance in a region overlapping with the light-blocking portion 1188 is 0%, and transmittance in a region where neither the light-blocking portion 1188 nor the semi-light-transmitting portion 1187 is provided is 100%. Further, transmittance at the semi-light-transmitting portion 1187 is approximately in the range of 10 to 70%, which can be adjusted by the kind, thickness, or the like of a material to be used.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 includes the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a , the mixed layer 1115 b , and a layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor (see FIG. 20C ).
- separated third resist masks 1123 are formed with the second resist mask 1113 eroded. Ashing using oxygen plasma may be performed in order that the resist mask recede. Here, ashing is performed on the second resist mask 1113 so that the resist mask 1113 is separated over the gate electrode. Thus, the third resist masks 1123 can be formed (see FIG. 21A ).
- the conductive layer 1111 is etched using the third resist masks 1123 , so that the wirings 1125 functioning as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed (see FIG. 21B ). It is preferable that the conductive layer 1111 be removed by wet etching. By wet etching, the conductive layer is isotropically etched. Accordingly, the conductive layer recedes to an inner side than those of the resist masks 1123 , so that the wirings 1125 are formed.
- the wiring 1125 functions not only as a source electrode or a drain electrode but also as a signal line. However, this embodiment is not limited to this.
- the signal line may be provided separately from the source electrode and the drain electrode.
- the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor and the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 are partly etched.
- dry etching is used.
- an amorphous semiconductor layer 1129 c having a depression on its surface, and the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 functioning as a source and drain regions are formed.
- the third resist masks 1123 are removed (see FIG. 21C ).
- each of the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor and the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 is partly etched by dry etching.
- the conductive layer 1119 is isotropically etched, and side surfaces of the wirings 1125 are not aligned with side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 . That is, the side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 are formed on an outer side than the side surfaces of the wirings 1125 .
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 and the layers 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor may be partly etched after removal of the third resist masks 1123 .
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched using the wirings 1125 , so that the side surfaces of the wirings 1125 are approximately aligned with the side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 .
- dry etching may be performed after the third resist masks 1123 are removed.
- the condition of dry etching is set so that the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged and an etching rate with respect to the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is low.
- a condition which gives almost no damages to the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and hardly reduces the thickness of the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is used.
- As an etching gas Cl 2 , CF 4 , N 2 , or the like is typically used.
- an etching method there is no particular limitation on an etching method, and an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) method, a capacitively coupled plasma (CCP) method, an electron cyclotron resonance (ECR) method, a reactive ion etching (RIE) method, or the like can be used.
- ICP inductively coupled plasma
- CCP capacitively coupled plasma
- ECR electron cyclotron resonance
- RIE reactive ion etching
- a surface of layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor containing an amorphous semiconductor may be irradiated with water plasma, ammonia plasma, nitrogen plasma, or the like.
- Water plasma treatment can be performed in such a manner that a gas containing water as a main component typified by water vapor (H 2 O vapor) is introduced into a reaction space so that plasma is generated.
- a gas containing water as a main component typified by water vapor H 2 O vapor
- dry etching is further performed under a condition where the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged after the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 are formed, so that an impurity element such as a residue existing on the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be removed.
- water plasma treatment is performed after the dry etching, so that a residue of the resist mask can be removed.
- a thin film transistor with a channel region formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor layer can be manufactured with the use of fewer masks. Further, the thin film transistor having a small amount of off-state-current, a large amount of on-state-current, and high field-effect mobility can be manufactured.
- FIGS. 20A to 20C A method for manufacturing a thin film transistor, which is different from in Method 1, is described with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20C , FIGS. 23A to 23C , and FIGS. 24A and 24B .
- the gate electrode 1103 is formed over the substrate 1101 .
- the gate insulating layer 1105 and the first semiconductor layer 1106 are formed so as to cover the gate electrode 1103 (see FIG. 20A ).
- crystals are grown from the first semiconductor layer 1106 , whereby the second semiconductor layer 1107 including (the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a , the mixed layer 1107 b , and the layer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor) is formed.
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1109 is formed over the second semiconductor layer 1107 (see FIG. 23A ).
- a resist mask (not shown) is formed over the impurity semiconductor layer 1109 .
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 and the impurity semiconductor layer 1109 are etched. Through this step, the second semiconductor layer 1107 and the impurity semiconductor layer 1109 are separated into each element, so that the second semiconductor layer 1115 (including the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a , the mixed layer 1115 b , and the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor) and the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 are formed (see FIG. 23B ).
- a resist mask (not shown) is formed over the conductive layer 1111 , and the conductive layer 1111 is etched with the use of the resist mask, so that wirings 1133 functioning as a source and drain electrodes are formed (see FIG. 24A ).
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched so that the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 functioning as a source and drain regions are formed. Further, the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is etched so that the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is formed (see FIG. 24B ).
- the thin film transistor can be manufactured.
- the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is partly etched without removal of the resist mask after forming the wirings 1133 ; however, part of the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 and part of the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor may be etched after removal of the resist mask.
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched using the wirings 1133 as masks, so that side surfaces of the wirings 1133 are approximately aligned with side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 .
- dry etching is preferably performed after the resist mask is removed.
- the condition of dry etching is set so that the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged and an etching rate with respect to the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is low.
- a condition that a surface of the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is hardly damaged and the thickness of the exposed layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is hardly decreased is used.
- the surface of the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor may be irradiated with water plasma, ammonia plasma, nitrogen plasma, or the like.
- Water plasma treatment can be performed in such a manner that a gas containing water as a main component typified by water vapor (H 2 O vapor) is introduced into a reaction space so that plasma is generated.
- a gas containing water as a main component typified by water vapor H 2 O vapor
- dry etching is further performed under a condition where the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged after the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is formed, so that an impurity element such as a residue existing on the layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be removed.
- water plasma treatment is performed after the dry etching, so that a residue of the resist mask can be removed.
- FIG. 19 Next, a method for manufacturing the thin film transistor shown in FIG. 19 is described with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20C , FIGS. 21A to 21C , and FIGS. 25A to 25C .
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched so that the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 are formed. Further the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is etched so that a pair of layers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor is formed (see FIG. 25A ).
- a condition is used as appropriate under which the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is selectively etched by wet etching or dry etching so that the second microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b is exposed.
- an etchant which enables wet etching whereby an amorphous semiconductor layer can selectively be etched
- an etchant including hydrazine, potassium hydroxide, or ethylenediamine can be used.
- an etchant including a mixed solution of hydrofluoric acid and nitric acid can be used.
- a tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide (also referred to as TMAH) aqueous solution can be used.
- hydrogen can be used as an etching gas which enables dry etching whereby an amorphous semiconductor layer can selectively be etched.
- a gas containing chlorine, bromine, or iodine can be used as the etching gas.
- hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, hydrogen iodide, silicon tetrachloride, phosphorus trichloride, boron trichloride or the like can be used.
- a gas containing fluorine can be used as the etching gas.
- tetrafluoromethane sulfur hexafluoride, nitrogen trifluoride, silicon tetrafluoride, boron trifluoride, xenon difluoride, chlorine trifluoride, or the like can be used.
- a mixed gas of tetrafluoromethane and oxygen, or a mixed gas of sulfur hexafluoride and chlorine can be used as the etching gas.
- a resist mask is removed, and plasma treatment 1140 by which surfaces of the second microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b , the pair of layers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor, the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 , and the wirings 1125 is oxidized or nitrided is performed, whereby the first insulating layer 1135 a , the second insulating layers 1135 c , and the third insulating layers 1135 e shown in FIG. 25C are formed.
- the pair of layers 1132 include an amorphous semiconductor and thus have a weak n-type conductivity.
- the pair of layer 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor has lower density than the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 . Therefore, the second insulating layers 1135 c formed by oxidizing or nitriding the pair of layers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor is insulating layers having low density and low insulating property.
- the first insulating layer 1135 a formed by oxidizing the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 is formed on a back channel side.
- the microcrystalline semiconductor layer has higher density than the amorphous semiconductor layer, and the first insulating layer 1135 a thus has also high density and a high insulating property. Further, the second insulating layer 1131 b has a plurality of conical or pyramidal protrusions (projections) and thus has an uneven surface. Therefore, a leak path between a source region and a drain region has a long distance. Accordingly, a reduction in off-state-current of the thin film transistor can be realized.
- the impurity semiconductor layer 1127 and the layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor are etched using the wirings 1125 as masks, side surfaces of the wirings 1125 are approximately aligned with side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127 .
- an insulating layer is formed on the surface of the second microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b by plasma treatment; thus, a leak path between the source region and the drain region can have a long distance, and an insulating layer having a high insulating property can be formed.
- a method for manufacturing the second semiconductor layer 1107 which can be applied to any of Methods 1 to 3, is described below.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 instead of using the gas containing nitrogen as the source gas of the second semiconductor layer 1107 , by forming the second semiconductor layer 1107 after forming a layer containing nitrogen in a treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus, the second semiconductor layer 1107 can be supplied with nitrogen.
- the substrate is carried out of the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus.
- a layer containing nitrogen is formed in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus.
- a silicon nitride layer is formed.
- a source gas used for deposition of the second semiconductor layer 1107 is introduced into the treatment chamber, and the second semiconductor layer 1107 is formed.
- a deposition gas including silicon or germanium, and hydrogen are used as a source gas.
- the layer containing nitrogen formed on the inner wall of the treatment chamber is exposed to plasma, whereby part of the layer containing nitrogen is dissociated and nitrogen is desorbed.
- the nitrogen concentration which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry has a peak at an upper portion of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a , or in the vicinity of the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and the mixed layer 1107 b , and is decreased with respect to a direction in which the second semiconductor layer 107 is deposited.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 can be formed.
- a method for manufacturing the second semiconductor layer 1107 which can be applied to any of Methods 1 to 3, is described below.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 instead of using the gas containing nitrogen as the source gas of the second semiconductor layer 1107 , by forming the second semiconductor layer 1107 after introducing a gas containing nitrogen in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus before forming the second semiconductor layer 1107 , the second semiconductor layer 1107 can be supplied with nitrogen.
- the surface of the first semiconductor layer 1106 is exposed to the gas containing nitrogen (here, this treatment is referred to as flush treatment), so that nitrogen is supplied to the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus.
- the gas containing nitrogen ammonia, nitrogen, nitrogen fluoride, nitrogen chloride, and the like can be given.
- hydrogen may be included in any of the gas containing nitrogen.
- the surface of the first semiconductor layer 1106 is exposed to ammonia, whereby nitrogen is supplied.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 is formed.
- a source gas used for deposition of the second semiconductor layer 1107 is introduced into the treatment chamber, the second semiconductor layer 1107 is formed.
- a deposition gas including silicon or germanium, and hydrogen are used as a source gas.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 In the formation step of the second semiconductor layer 1107 , a gas containing nitrogen introduced into the treatment chamber by the flush treatment, in this case, ammonia is decomposed by plasma discharge, so that nitrogen is desorbed. Alternatively, an NH group is generated. As a result, the second semiconductor layer 1107 contains nitrogen, so that the second semiconductor layer 1107 including the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a , the mixed layer 1107 b , and the layer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be formed as shown in FIG. 18A . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 18B , the second semiconductor layer 1107 including the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and the mixed layer 1107 b can be formed.
- the nitrogen concentration which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry has a peak at an upper portion of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a or in the vicinity of the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and the mixed layer 1107 b and is decreased with respect to a direction in which the mixed layer 1107 b and the layer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor are deposited.
- the second semiconductor layer 1107 can be formed.
- a thin film transistor included in a display device examples of methods for manufacturing a thin film transistor included in a display device are described.
- Such a structure can be combined with any of the shift registers in Embodiments 1 to 5.
- a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region of the thin film transistor, an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved.
- a microcrystalline semiconductor for the channel region degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, so that the life of the display device can be extended.
- FIG. 26A A cross-sectional structure taken along line C-D in FIG. 26A is described with reference to FIG. 26B .
- the pixel portion 1603 the scan line driver circuit 1605 b which is part of a peripheral driver circuit portion, and a terminal portion 1617 , which are formed over the substrate 1601 , are shown.
- a thin film transistor 1621 to be provided in the second scan line driver circuit 1605 b and a thin film transistor 1623 to be provided in the pixel portion 1603 are formed over the substrate 1601 . Further, insulating layers 1625 and 1627 are formed over the thin film transistors 1621 and 1623 . Furthermore, a wiring 1629 to be connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of the thin film transistor 1621 through an opening portion in the insulating layer 1625 and a pixel electrode 1631 to be connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of the thin film transistor 1623 through an opening portion in the insulating layer 1625 are formed. Moreover, an insulating layer 1635 is formed over the insulating layer 1627 , the wiring 1629 , and the pixel electrode 1631 .
- Each of the insulating layer 1625 and the insulating layer 1627 can be formed using an inorganic insulating layer, an organic resin layer, or the like.
- an inorganic insulating layer a silicon oxide layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, a silicon nitride oxide layer, or a carbon layer typified by diamond like carbon (DLC), or the like can be used.
- an organic resin layer an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or the like can be used.
- a siloxane polymer can be used.
- the insulating layer 1625 and the insulating layer 1627 is formed using an organic resin layer, planarity can be improved; thus, alignment of liquid crystal molecules can easily be controlled.
- the wiring 1629 and the pixel electrode 1631 can be formed using indium oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, indium tin oxide to which silicon oxide is added, or the like.
- the wiring 1629 and the pixel electrode 1631 can be formed using a conductive composition containing a light-transmitting conductive high molecule (also referred to as a conductive polymer).
- a conductive composition containing a light-transmitting conductive high molecule also referred to as a conductive polymer.
- Each of the wiring 1629 and the pixel electrode 1631 preferably has a sheet resistance less than or equal to 10000 ohms/square and a light transmittance greater than or equal to 70% at a wavelength of 550 nm.
- the sheet resistance of each of the wiring 1629 and the pixel electrode 1631 is preferably lower.
- the resistivity of the conductive high molecule contained in the conductive composition be 0.1 ohm ⁇ cm or less.
- n electron conjugated conductive high molecule a so-called n electron conjugated conductive high molecule can be used.
- polyaniline or a derivative thereof, polypyrrole or a derivative thereof, polythiophene or a derivative thereof, a copolymer of two or more kinds of them, or the like can be used.
- the pixel electrode 1631 when the pixel electrode 1631 functions as a reflective electrode, the pixel electrode 1631 can be formed using aluminum, silver, or the like; or an alloy thereof, or the like.
- a two-layer structure of aluminum and titanium, molybdenum, tantalum, chromium, or tungsten; or a three-layer structure in which aluminum is interposed between any of metals such as titanium, molybdenum, tantalum, chromium, or tungsten may be employed.
- An opening portion is formed in the pixel electrode 1631 .
- the opening portion formed in the conductive film can have the same function as a protrusion used in an MVA mode because the opening portion can make liquid crystal molecules slanted.
- the insulating layer 1635 functions as an alignment film.
- the spacer 1647 may be formed in a manner that particles of several micrometers are dispersed or in a manner that a resin layer is formed over the entire surface of the substrate and then etched.
- the conductive layer 1641 functions as a counter electrode.
- the conductive layer 1641 can be formed using a material similar to that of the wiring 1629 or the pixel electrode 1631 .
- the insulating layer 1643 functions as an alignment film.
- connection terminal 1659 is formed in the terminal portion 1617 .
- the connection terminal 1659 is electrically connected to the pixel portion 1603 and a wiring 1655 in the peripheral driver circuit portion.
- the connection terminal 1659 is formed in a manner similar to those in the pixel electrode 1631 in the pixel portion 1603 and the wiring 1629 in the peripheral driver circuit portion.
- the FPC 1613 is provided over the connection terminal 1659 with an anisotropic conductive layer 1657 interposed therebetween. Further, the IC chip 1615 is provided over the FPC 1613 with an anisotropic conductive layer 1661 interposed therebetween. That is, the FPC 1613 , the anisotropic conductive layers 1657 and 1661 , and the IC chip 1615 are electrically connected to each other.
- An adhesive material such as an ACF (anisotropic conductive film) or ACP (anisotropic conductive paste) can be used for the anisotropic conductive layers 1657 and 1661 .
- a conductive adhesive such as silver paste, copper paste, or carbon paste, solder joint, or the like can be used for the anisotropic conductive layers 1657 and 1661 .
- a functional circuit e.g., a memory or a buffer
- the area of the substrate can be efficiently utilized.
- the display mode may be a PVA (patterned vertical alignment) mode.
- a slit may be provided for the conductive layer 1641 formed on the substrate 1611 , so that liquid crystal molecules can be slanted to be aligned.
- the protrusion 1645 also referred to as the alignment control protrusion
- the conductive film for which the slit is provided, so that liquid crystal molecules can be slanted to be aligned.
- the display mode of liquid crystals is not limited to the MVA mode or the PVA mode, and a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an FFS (fringe field switching) mode, an ASM (axially symmetric aligned micro-cell) mode, an OCB (optical compensated birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (antiferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, or the like can be used.
- TN twisted nematic
- IPS in-plane-switching
- FFS far field switching
- ASM axially symmetric aligned micro-cell
- OCB optical compensated birefringence
- FLC ferrroelectric liquid crystal
- AFLC antiferroelectric liquid crystal
- a structure may be used in which a driver circuit corresponding to the signal line driver circuit 1607 is formed as a driver IC and is mounted on a liquid crystal panel by COG or the like, as illustrated in FIG. 13B .
- the signal line driver circuit 1607 is formed as the driver IC, power can be saved.
- the driver IC as a semiconductor chip formed using a silicon wafer or the like, high speed operation and low power consumption of the liquid crystal panel can be achieved.
- a cross-sectional structure of the display device is described. Such a structure can be combined with any of the shift registers in Embodiments 1 to 5.
- a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region of the thin film transistor, an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved. Further, by the use of a microcrystalline semiconductor for a semiconductor layer, degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, so that the life of the display device can be extended.
- a display device can be used in a variety of electronic devices (including an amusement machine).
- electronic devices are a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver), a monitor of a computer, electronic paper, a camera such as a digital camera or a digital video camera, a digital photo frame, a mobile phone handset (also referred to as a mobile phone or a mobile phone device), a portable game machine, a portable information terminal, an audio reproducing device, a large game machine such as a pinball machine, and the like.
- Electronic paper which is one embodiment of the display device according to any of the above embodiments can be used in electronic devices in all fields as long as they display information.
- electronic paper can be used in an electronic book (e-book) reader, a poster, an advertisement in a vehicle such as a train, display of a variety of cards such as credit cards, or the like.
- FIG. 27A illustrates an example of an electronic device.
- FIG. 27A illustrates an example of an e-book reader.
- the e-book reader illustrated in FIG. 27A includes two housings 1700 and 1701 .
- the housings 1700 and 1701 are combined with each other with a hinge 1704 , so that the e-book reader can be opened and closed. With such a structure, the e-book reader can be operated like a paper book.
- a display portion 1702 is incorporated in the housing 1700
- a display portion 1703 is incorporated in the housing 1701 .
- the display portions 1702 and 1703 may display a series of images or different images.
- a display portion on the right side can display text
- a display portion on the left side can display images.
- FIG. 27A illustrates an example in which the housing 1700 includes an operation portion and the like.
- the housing 1700 includes a power input terminal 1705 , operation keys 1706 , a speaker 1707 , and the like. With the operation keys 1706 , pages can be turned.
- a keyboard, a pointing device, or the like may be provided on a surface of the housing, on which the display portion is provided.
- an external connection terminal e.g. an earphone terminal, a USB terminal, or a terminal which can be connected to a variety of cables such as USB cables
- a recording medium insertion portion, or the like may be provided on a back surface or a side surface of the housing.
- the e-book reader illustrated in FIG. 27A may serve as an electronic dictionary.
- the e-book reader illustrated in FIG. 27A may transmit and receive data wirelessly. Through wireless communication, data related to a desired book or the like can be purchased and downloaded from an electronic book server.
- FIG. 27B shows an example of a digital photo frame using a display device such as electronic paper, a liquid crystal display device, or a light-emitting display device.
- a display portion 1712 is incorporated in a housing 1711 .
- the display portion 1712 can display a variety of images.
- the display portion 1712 can display data related to images photographed by a digital camera or the like, so that the digital photo frame can function as a normal photo frame.
- the digital photo frame illustrated in FIG. 27B includes an operation portion, an external connection portion (e.g., a USB terminal or a terminal which can be connected to a variety of cables such as USB cables), a recording medium insertion portion, and the like. Although they may be provided on a surface on which the display portion is provided, it is preferable to provide them on a side surface or a back surface because the design of the digital photo frame is improved. For example, a memory which stores data related to images photographed by a digital camera is inserted in the recording medium insertion portion of the digital photo frame, so that the data related to the images can be loaded to the digital photo frame and can be displayed on the display portion 1712 .
- the digital photo frame illustrated in FIG. 27B may transmit and receive data wirelessly. Through wireless communication, data related to desired images can be loaded and displayed.
- FIG. 27C shows an example of a television set in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a light-emitting display device is used.
- a display portion 1722 is incorporated in a housing 1721 .
- the display portion 1722 can display images. Further, here, the housing 1721 is supported by a stand 1723 .
- the display device described in any of the above embodiments can be used in the display portion 1722 .
- the television set illustrated in FIG. 27C can be operated by an operation switch of the housing 1721 or a separate remote controller. Channels and volume can be controlled by operation keys of the remote controller, so that images displayed on the display portion 1722 can be controlled. Further, the remote controller may include a display portion for displaying data output from the remote controller.
- the television set illustrated in FIG. 27C includes a receiver, a modem, and the like.
- a general television broadcast can be received.
- the television set by connecting the television set to a wired or wireless communication network via the modem, one-way (from a transmitter to a receiver) or two-way (between a transmitter and a receiver, between receivers, or the like) information communication can be performed.
- FIG. 27D shows an example of a mobile phone handset in which a display device such as electronic paper, a liquid crystal display device, or a light-emitting display device is used.
- the mobile phone handset illustrated in FIG. 27D includes a display portion 1732 incorporated in a housing 1731 , operation buttons 1733 and 1737 , an external connection port 1734 , a speaker 1735 , a microphone 1736 , and the like.
- data displayed on the display portion 1732 can be automatically changed by determining the orientation of the mobile phone handset (whether the mobile phone handset is placed horizontally or vertically).
- the screen modes are changed by touching the display portion 1732 or operating the operation button 1737 of the housing 1731 .
- the screen modes may be changed depending on the kind of an image displayed on the display portion 1732 . For example, when a signal of an image displayed on the display portion is moving image data, the screen mode can be changed into the display mode. When the signal is text data, the screen mode can be changed into the input mode.
- the screen mode when input by touching the display portion 1732 is not performed for a certain period while a signal detected by an optical sensor in the display portion 1732 is detected, the screen mode may be controlled so as to be changed from the input mode into the display mode.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Shift Register Type Memory (AREA)
- Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal Display Device Control (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Logic Circuits (AREA)
- Thin Film Transistor (AREA)
- Electronic Switches (AREA)
- Control Of El Displays (AREA)
Abstract
An object of the present invention is to suppress deterioration in the thin film transistor. A plurality of pulse output circuits each include first to eleventh thin film transistors is formed. The pulse output circuit is operated on the basis of a plurality of clock signals which control each transistor, the previous stage signal input from a pulse output circuit in the previous stage, the next stage signal input from a pulse output circuit in the next stage, and a reset signal. In addition, a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a semiconductor layer serving as a channel region of each transistor. Therefore, degradation of characteristics of the transistor can be suppressed.
Description
- This invention relates to a driver circuit, a display device including a driver circuit formed over a common substrate with a pixel portion, or an electronic device including the display device.
- With the widespread use of large display devices such as liquid crystal televisions, display devices are required to be higher-value-added and thus under development. Particularly, a technique to configure a driver circuit such as a gate driver over a common substrate with a pixel portion using thin film transistors (TFTs) whose channel region is made from an amorphous semiconductor is actively developed because the technique helps a reduction in cost and an improvement in reliability a lot.
- A thin film transistor whose channel region is formed from an amorphous semiconductor causes deterioration such as an increase in threshold voltage or a decrease in field-effect mobility. If deterioration in the thin film transistor proceeds, there arises a problem such that a driver circuit may have difficulty in operation and may fall to display an image. Therefore, a shift register capable of suppressing deterioration in a transistor is disclosed in
Patent Document 1. In thePatent Document 1, in order to suppress degradation of transistor characteristics, two transistors are provided and the transistors are connected between an output terminal of a flip-flop and a wiring to which a low-voltage power supply potential VSS is supplied. Thus, the transistors become conducting in turn. In such a manner, a period during which each of the transistors is conducting can be shortened by approximately half in a frame period; therefore, degradation of transistor characteristics of the transistors can be suppressed to some extent. [Reference] - [Patent Document 1] Japanese Published Patent Application No. 2005-050502
- An object of an embodiment of the invention is to provide a deriver circuit and a display device which can suppress degradation of characteristics of a thin film transistor.
- One embodiment of the invention is a driver circuit including a plurality of pulse output circuits. Each of the plurality of pulse output circuits includes a first thin film transistor to an eleventh thin film transistor. Each of the plurality of pulse output circuits is electrically connected to a first signal line to a seventh signal line, a first power supply line to a second power supply line. As for the first thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line, a second terminal is electrically connected to a gate of the third thin film transistor, a gate of the fourth thin film transistor, a gate of the fifth thin film transistor, a second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor, and a first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the second signal line. As for the second thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the third thin film transistor and a second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to a gate of the sixth thin film transistor and a gate of the seventh thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the first power supply line. As for the third thin film transistor, the first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. As for the fourth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and a second terminal of the sixth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. As for the fifth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, a second terminal of the seventh thin film transistor and a first terminal of the eleventh thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. As for the sixth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line, the second terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and the first terminal of the fourth thin film transistor, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the seventh thin film transistor. As for the seventh thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line, the second terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, the first terminal of the fifth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the eleventh thin film transistor, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the sixth thin film transistor. As for the eighth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line, the second terminal is electrically connected to the first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the first terminal of the third thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line. As for the ninth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line, the second terminal is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the fifth signal line. As for the tenth thin film transistor, the first terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, and the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line. As for the eleventh thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, the first terminal of the fifth thin film transistor, and the second terminal of the seventh thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and a gate is electrically connected to the third signal line.
- One embodiment of the invention is a driver circuit including a plurality of pulse output circuits. Each of the plurality of pulse output circuits includes a first thin film transistor to an eleventh thin film transistor. Each of the plurality of pulse output circuits is electrically connected to a first signal line to a seventh signal line, a first power supply line, a second power supply line, and a third power supply line. As for the first thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line, a second terminal is electrically connected to a gate of the third thin film transistor, a gate of the fourth thin film transistor, a gate of the fifth thin film transistor, a second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor, and a first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the second signal line. As for the second thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the third thin film transistor and a second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to a gate of the sixth thin film transistor and a gate of the seventh thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the third power supply line. As for the third thin film transistor, the first terminal is electrically connected to a first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the second terminal of the eighth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. As for the fourth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and a second terminal of the sixth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. As for the fifth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, a second terminal of the seventh thin flUm transistor and a first terminal of the eleventh thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. As for the sixth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line, the second terminal is electrically connected to the seventh signal line and the first terminal of the fourth thin film transistor, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the seventh thin film transistor. As for the seventh thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first signal line, the second terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, the first terminal of the fifth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the eleventh thin film transistor, and the gate is electrically connected to the second terminal of the second thin film transistor and the gate of the sixth thin film transistor. As for the eighth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line, the second terminal is electrically connected to the first terminal of the second thin film transistor and the first terminal of the third thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line. As for the ninth thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the first power supply line, the second terminal is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor, and a gate is electrically connected to the fifth signal line. As for the tenth thin film transistor, the first terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, and the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and a gate is electrically connected to the fourth signal line. As for the eleventh thin film transistor, a first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth signal line, the first terminal of the fifth thin film transistor, and the second terminal of the seventh thin film transistor, a second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line, and a gate is electrically connected to the third signal line.
- In the driver circuit, a reset signal may be supplied to the second signal line, the previous stage signal may be supplied to the fourth signal line, the next stage signal may be supplied to the fifth signal line, and a first output signal and a second output signal may respectively be output from the sixth signal line and the seventh signal line. A clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in odd-numbered stages and an inverted clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in odd-numbered stages. The inverted clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in even-numbered stages and the clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in even-numbered stages.
- In the driver circuit, the inverted clock signal may be delayed from the clock signal by half of a cycle.
- In the driver circuit, the reset signal may be supplied to the second signal line, the previous stage signal may be supplied to the fourth signal line, the next stage signal may be supplied to the fifth signal line, and the first output signal and the second output signal may respectively be output from the sixth signal line and the seventh signal line. A first clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J−3)th stage (J is preferably a multiple of 4 which is 4 or more) and a second clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J−3)th stage. The second clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J−2)th stage and the third clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J−2)th stage. The third clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J−1)th stage and the fourth clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in (J−1)th stage. The fourth clock signal may be supplied to the first signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in J-th stage and the first clock signal may be supplied to the third signal line of each of the plurality of pulse output circuits in J-th stage.
- In the driver circuit, the fourth clock signal may be delayed from the third clock signal by a fourth of a cycle, the third clock signal may be delayed from the second clock signal by a fourth of a cycle, the second clock signal may be delayed from the first clock signal by a fourth of a cycle, the first clock signal may be delayed from the fourth clock signal by a fourth of a cycle.
- The driver circuit may include a capacitor. One electrode is electrically connected to a second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, a second terminal of the thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. The other electrode is electrically connected to the second power supply line.
- The driver circuit may include a twelfth thin film transistor. A first terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the first thin film transistor, the gate of the third thin film transistor, the gate of the fourth thin film transistor, the gate of the fifth thin film transistor, the second terminal of the ninth thin film transistor, and the first terminal of the tenth thin film transistor. A second terminal is electrically connected to the second power supply line. A gate is electrically connected to the seventh signal line.
- In the driver circuit, the first thin film transistor to the eleventh thin film transistor may each include a microcrystalline silicon in a channel region.
- According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a driver circuit in which degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed.
-
FIGS. 1A to 1D are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 2A and 2B are a circuit diagram of a driver circuit and a timing chart for an explanation of operation of the driver circuit; -
FIGS. 3A and 3B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 6A and 6B are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 7A to 7C are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 8A and 8B are a circuit diagram of a driver circuit and a timing chart for an explanation of operation of the driver circuit; -
FIGS. 9A and 9B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing operation of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 12A and 12B are block diagrams of a display device; -
FIGS. 13A to 13D are block diagrams of a display device; -
FIGS. 14A and 14B are a circuit diagram of a driver circuit and a timing chart for an explanation of an operation of the driver circuit; -
FIGS. 15A to 15C are a circuit diagrams of a pixel and timing charts for an explanation of an operation of the pixel; -
FIGS. 16A to 16C are circuit diagrams of a pixel; -
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 18A and 18B are cross-sectional views showing a driver circuit; -
FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view showing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 20A to 20C are cross-sectional views showing a manufacturing method of a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 21A to 21C are cross-sectional views showing a method for manufacturing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 22A-1, 22A-2, 22B-1, and 22B-2 are diagrams showing multi-tone masks applicable to a method for manufacturing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 23A to 23C are cross-sectional views showing a method for manufacturing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 24A and 24B are cross-sectional views showing a method for manufacturing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 25A to 25C am cross-sectional views showing a method for manufacturing a driver circuit; -
FIGS. 26A and 26B are a top view and a cross-sectional view showing a display device; -
FIGS. 27A to 27D are diagrams showing electronic devices including a display device; -
FIGS. 28A and 28B are circuit diagrams of a driver circuit; -
FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram of a driver circuit; -
FIG. 30 is a circuit diagram of a driver circuit. - Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the embodiments can be implemented in many different modes, and it is to be easily understood by those skilled in the art that modes and details of the present invention can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the description of the following embodiments. Note that in structures described below, reference numerals denoting the same portions or portions having similar functions are used in common in different drawings, and detailed description thereof is not repeated.
- Note that as for some components shown in some of the drawings, etc. for the embodiments, the size, the layer thickness, and distortion in signal waveforms are exaggerated for purposes of clarity and are thus not necessarily limit the actual sizes of those components.
- Note that the terms such as “first”, “second”, and “third” in this specification are used in order to avoid confusion between components and do not set a limitation on number.
- In this embodiment, an embodiment of a driver circuit and a structure of a thin film transistor are described.
- First, a structure of the driver circuit is described. The driver circuit in this embodiment can function as a shift register used for a gate driver, a source driver, or a display device, for example.
- A driver circuit which functions as a shift register is described with reference to
FIGS. 1A to 1D .FIGS. 2A and 2B ,FIGS. 3A and 3B ,FIGS. 4A and 4B ,FIGS. 5A and 5B ,FIGS. 6A and 6B ,FIGS. 28A and 28B , andFIG. 29 . Ashift register 100 includes first to N-th pulse output circuits 101_1 to 101_N (N≥3) (seeFIG. 1A ). A clock signal CK, an inverted clock signal CKB, and a reset signal RES are input respectively from afirst wiring 102, asecond wiring 103, and athird wiring 104 to each of the first to N-th pulse output circuits 1011 to 101_N in theshift register 100 shown inFIG. 1A . A start pulse SP or a signal, referred to as the previous stage signal Lin, which is from the pulse output circuit in the previous stage, is input to the pulse output circuit in each stage. In addition, a signal, referred to as the next stage signal Rin, which is from the pulse output circuit in the next stage, is input to the pulse output circuit in each stage. The pulse output circuit in each stage outputs a first output signal Gout to a gate line, a data line, etc. and outputs a second output signal SRout to the pulse output circuit in the previous and/or next stage. Note that the pulse output circuit in a dummy stage for outputting a signal which does not affect display in a display portion may be provided. For example, in the structure where the plurality of pulse output circuits are used as a shift register in a gate driver and output pulses sequentially to n gate lines, N stages (n≤N) may be provided. - Note that terminals to which the clock signal CK and the inverted clock signal CKB are input are different between the odd-numbered stages and the even-numbered stages of the plurality of pulse output circuits. Specifically, if the odd-numbered stages of the pulse output circuit 101_1 has a structure as shown in
FIG. 1B in which the clock signal CK is input to a first terminal, the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal, the inverted clock signal CKB is input to a third terminal, the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal, the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal, a first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal, and a second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal, the even-numbered stages of the pulse output circuit 1012 has a structure as shown inFIG. 1C in which the inverted clock signal CKB is input to a first terminal, the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal, the clock signal CK is input to a third terminal, the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal, the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal, an output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal, and a second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal. Note that the clock signal CK and the inverted clock signal CKB become an H-level signal (high power supply potential level) and an L-level signal (low power supply potential level) repeatedly at a regular interval. Here, the inverted clock signal is delayed from the clock signal CK by half of a cycle. - Note that a voltage indicates a potential difference between a potential and a reference potential (e.g., a ground potential) in many cases. Therefore, in this specification, a voltage and a potential can be interchanged with each other for explanation.
- Next, a specific example of the circuit structure of the pulse output circuit is described with reference to
FIG. 1D . Note that inFIG. 1D , a structure of the pulse output circuit in the odd-numbered stage is described as an example. Note that a difference between the plurality of pulse output circuits in the odd-numbered stages and that in the even-numbered stages is, as described above, in the terminals to which the clock signal CK and the inverted clock signal CKB are input. - The pulse output circuit includes a first
thin film transistor 111 to an elevenththin film transistor 121. In addition,FIG. 1D shows the case where a high-voltage power supply potential VDD is supplied through a firstpower supply line 131 and a low-voltage power supply potential VSS is supplied through a secondpower supply line 132 besides the signals which are input to a first terminal to a seventh terminal. Note that inFIG. 1D , a wiring for inputting the clock signal CK to a first terminal is afirst signal line 151, a wiring for inputting the reset signal RES to a second terminal is asecond signal line 152, a wiring for inputting the inverted clock signal to a third terminal is athird signal line 153, a wiring for inputting the previous stage signal Lin to a fourth terminal is afourth signal line 154, a wiring for inputting the next stage signal Rin to a fifth terminal is afifth signal line 155, and a wiring through which a sixth terminal outputs a first output signal Gout is asixth signal line 156, a wiring through which a seventh terminal outputs a second output signal SRout is aseventh signal line 157. - As for the first
thin film transistor 111, a first terminal is connected to the firstpower supply line 131, a second terminal is connected to a gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, a gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, a gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, a second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, and a first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120, and a gate is connected to thesecond signal line 152. As for the secondthin film transistor 112, a first terminal is connected to a first terminal of the thirdthin film transistor 113 and a second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118, a second terminal is connected to a gate of the sixththin film transistor 116 and a gate of the sevenththin film transistor 117, and a gate is connected to the firstpower supply line 131. As for the thirdthin film transistor 113, the first terminal is connected to the first terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112 and the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118, a second terminal is connected to the secondpower supply line 132, and the gate is connected to the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, the second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120. As for the fourththin film transistor 114, a first terminal is connected to theseventh signal line 157 and a second terminal of the sixththin film transistor 116, a second terminal is connected to the secondpower supply line 132, and the gate is connected to the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, the second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120. As for the fifththin film transistor 115, a first terminal is connected to thesixth signal line 156, a second terminal of the sevenththin film transistor 117, and a first terminal of the elevenththin film transistor 121, a second terminal is connected to the secondpower supply line 132, and the gate is connected to the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120. As for the sixththin film transistor 116, a first terminal is connected to thefirst signal line 151, the second terminal is connected to theseventh signal line 157 and the first terminal of the fourththin film transistor 114, and the gate is connected to the second terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112 and the gate of the sevenththin film transistor 117. As for the sevenththin film transistor 117, a first terminal is connected to thefirst signal line 151, the second terminal is connected to thesixth signal line 156, the first terminal of the fifththin film transistor 115, and the first terminal of the elevenththin film transistor 121, and the gate is connected to the second terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112 and the gate of the sixththin film transistor 116. As for the eighththin film transistor 118, a first terminal is connected to the firstpower supply line 131, the second terminal is connected to the first terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112 and the first terminal of the thirdthin film transistor 113, and a gate is connected to thefourth signal line 154. As for the ninththin film transistor 119, a first terminal is connected to the firstpower supply line 131, the second terminal is connected to a second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120, and a gate is connected to thefifth signal line 155. As for the tenththin film transistor 120, the first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, and the second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, a second terminal is connected to the secondpower supply line 132, and a gate is connected to thefourth signal line 154. As for the elevenththin film transistor 121, a first terminal is connected to thesixth signal line 156, the first terminal of the fifththin film transistor 115, and the second terminal of the sevenththin film transistor 117, a second terminal is connected to the secondpower supply line 132, and a gate is connected to thethird signal line 153. - Note that between the gate and the second terminal of the sixth
thin film transistor 116 and between the gate and the second terminal of the sevenththin film transistor 117, capacitors may additionally be provided which perform a bootstrap operation by making each of the gates of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 in a floating state. Alternatively, if the bootstrap operation can be realized by a gate capacity of the sixththin film transistor 116 and a gate capacity of the sevenththin film transistor 117, the capacitor can be removed. - Note that a thin film transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source. The thin film transistor has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and current can flow through the drain region, the channel region, and the source region. Here, since the source and the drain of the thin film transistor may interchange depending on the structure, the operating condition, and the like of the thin film transistor, it is difficult to define which is a source or a drain. Thus, a region which serves as a source or a drain is not referred to as a source or a drain in some cases. In such a case, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first terminal and the other may be referred to as a second terminal, for example. Alternatively, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first electrode and the other may be referred to as a second electrode, for example. Further alternatively, one of the source and the drain may be referred to as a first region and the other may be referred to as a second region, for example.
- Note that a structure of a thin film transistor can employ various modes without being limited to a specific stricture. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes can be used.
- As another example, a structure where gate electrodes an formed above and below a channel region can be used. Note that the structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel region is substantially equivalent to a structure where a plurality of thin film transistors is connected in parallel.
- A structure where a gate electrode is formed above a channel region, a structure where a gate electrode is formed below a channel region, a staggered structure, an inverted staggered structure, a structure where a channel region is divided into a plurality of regions, or a structure where channel regions are connected in parallel or in series can be used. In addition, a structure where a source electrode or a drain electrode overlaps with a channel region (or part thereof) can be used.
- Note that when it is explicitly described that “A and B am connected”, the case where A and B are electrically connected, the case where A and B are functionally connected, and the case where A and B are directly connected are included therein. Here, each of A and B is an object (e.g., a device, an element, a circuit, a wiring, an electrode, a terminal, a conductive film, or a layer). Accordingly, another element may be interposed between elements having a connection relation illustrated in drawings and texts, without limitation to a predetermined connection relation, for example, the connection relation illustrated in the drawings and the texts.
- For example, in the case where A and B are electrically connected, one or more elements which enable electrical connection between A and B (e.g., a switch, a thin film transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistor, and/or a diode) may be connected between A and B. Alternatively, in the case where A and B are functionally connected, one or more circuits which enable functional connection between A and B (e.g., a logic circuit such as an inverter, a NAND circuit, or a NOR circuit; a signal converter circuit such as a DA converter circuit, an AD converter circuit, or a gamma correction circuit; a potential level converter circuit such as a power supply circuit (e.g., a dc-dc converter, a step-up dc-dc converter, or a step-down dc-dc converter) or a level shifter circuit for changing a potential level of a signal; a voltage source; a current source; a switching circuit; an amplifier circuit such as a circuit which can increase signal amplitude, the amount of current, or the like, an operational amplifier, a differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, or a buffer circuit; a signal generation circuit; a memory circuit; and/or a control circuit) may be connected between A and B. For example, in the case where a signal output from A is transmitted to B even when another circuit is interposed between A and B, A and B are functionally connected.
- Note that when it is explicitly described that “A and B are electrically connected”, the case where A and B are electrically connected (i.e., the case where A and B are connected with another element or another circuit interposed therebetween), the case where A and B are functionally connected (i.e., the case where A and B are functionally connected with another circuit interposed therebetween), and the case where A and B are directly connected (i.e., the case where A and B are connected without another element or another circuit interposed therebetween) are included therein. That is, when it is explicitly described that “A and B are electrically connected”, the description is the same as the case where it is explicitly only described that “A and B are connected”.
- Note that a thin film transistor in this embodiment is a thin film transistor (TFT) formed using microcrystalline (also referred to as microcrystal, nanocrystal, or semi-amorphous) silicon for a channel layer. Therefore, a driver circuit can be made in which degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed.
- Note that instead of being thin film transistors, the first to third thin film transistors and the eighth to eleventh thin film transistors may be switches turned into a conduction state (an on state) or a non-conduction state (an off state) depending on an input signal.
- Note that a variety of switches can be used as a switch. For example, an electrical switch, a mechanical switch, or the like can be used. That is, any element can be used as long as it can control a current flow, without limitation to a certain element. For example, a transistor (e.g., a bipolar transistor or a MOS transistor), a diode (e.g., a PN diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, an MIM (metal insulator metal) diode, an MIS (metal insulator semiconductor) diode, or a diode-connected transistor), or the like can be used as a switch. Alternatively, a logic circuit in which such elements are combined can be used as a switch.
- Next, operation of a shift register shown in
FIGS. 1A to 1D is described with reference toFIGS. 2A and 2B ,FIGS. 3A and 3B ,FIGS. 4A and 48 ,FIGS. 5A and 5B , andFIGS. 6A and 6B . For explanation, note that a connection node of the second terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112, the gate of the sixththin film transistor 116, and the gate of the sevenththin film transistor 117 is a node A. Further, in order to specifically describe the operation of the shift register, a first period T1, a second period T2, a third period T3, a fourth period T4, and a fifth period T5, which are shown in a timing chart inFIG. 2B , are separately explained. Note that in the following description, the first to elevenththin film transistors 111 to 121 are N-channel thin film transistors and are in a conduction state when a gate-source voltage Vgs exceeds a threshold voltage (Vth). Also note that inFIG. 2B , the first to elevenththin film transistors 111 to 121 serve as a shift register included in a gate driver, and aperiod 201 is a vertical retrace period and aperiod 202 is a gate selection period. Further, the timing chart inFIG. 28 shows a specific example of the waveforms of the clock signal CK, the inverted clock signal CKB, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, the next stage signal Rin, and second output signal SRout of each of the stages (e.g., SRout1 of the first stage). Furthermore, a high power supply potential level and a low power supply potential level of each of the signals are respectively VDD and VSS, except the node A. In addition, a first output signal Gout1 is omitted because it has a wave form same as the second output signal SRout1. - In the first period T1, the reset signal RES becomes an H-level signal and the first
thin film transistor 111 whose gate is connected to thesecond signal line 152 are conducting. At the time, the clock signal CK is an H-level signal, and the inverted clock signal CKB, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. As shown inFIG. 3A , the firstthin film transistor 111 becomes conducting, and the secondthin film transistor 112, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 become conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIC 3A, and a potential of each of the wirings in the first period T1 is determined as shown inFIG. 2B . That is, the first period T1 is a period for reset of a potential of each of the wirings (i.e., for setting a potential at VSS) in the pulse output circuit. In addition, in the first period T1, the second output signal SRout1 is an L-level signal. - When the reset signal RES is input to the gate of the first
thin film transistor 111 every vertical retrace period which is theperiod 201, a node of each of the thin film transistors can be set at a potential of VDD or VSS. Therefore, a so-called dynamic circuit in this embodiment, which is driven with the use of a node in a floating state, each node can be reset, whereby the level of noise immunity and operation reliability can be improved to be equal to that of a static circuit. - Next, in the second period T2, the previous stage signal Lin is an H-level signal, and the eighth
thin film transistor 118 and the tenththin film transistor 120 whose gates are each connected to thefourth signal line 154 are thus conducting. At the time, the inverted clock signal CKB is an H-level signal, and the clock signal CK, the reset signal RES, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. Further, at the time, the eighththin film transistor 118 is conducting as illustrated inFIG. 3B . The secondthin film transistor 112 are conducting as in the first period T1, and a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 3B . At the time, the node A uses the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 as the source; therefore, a potential of the node A becomes a value VDD−Vth where a value of a threshold voltage Vth of the eighththin film transistor 118 is subtracted from a value of a potential of the firstpower supply line 131. When the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 has the value VDD−Vth, thethin film transistor 118 is non-conducting and the node A is in a floating state while maintaining the value VDD-Vth. Note that as shown inFIG. 3B , the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are conducting, but at the same time, since the potential of thefirst signal line 151 is VSS, a potential of each of the wirings in the second period T2 is determined as inFIG. 2B . That is, the second period T2 is a period where the node A in the pulse output circuit is in a floating state. In addition, in the second period T2, the second output signal SRout1 is an L-level signal. - Next, in the third period T3, the clock signal CK becomes an H-level signal. At the time, the inverted clock signal CKB, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. Further, at the time, as shown in
FIG. 4A , the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are conducting, that is, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are in a state where current flows between a source and a drain (as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 4A ), and a potential of each second terminal (the source side) of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 starts to increase. There is a capacitive coupling due to parasitic capacitance between a gate and a source of each of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117, so that a potential of the node A in a floating state increases as a potential of the second terminal serving as the source increases (bootstrap operation). The potential of the node A eventually becomes higher than VDD+Vth, and each second terminal of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 thus has a potential of VDD. Therefore, the second output signal SRout1 becomes an H-level signal in the third period T3, that is, a potential of the node A in a floating state is increased by the bootstrap operation and the first output signal Gout1 and the second output signal SRout1 are output as H-level signals. Then, the second output signal SRout1 is input as the previous stage signal Lin to the pulse output circuit in a second stage. - Note that as shown in
FIG. 1D , by providing the secondthin film transistor 112 whose gate is supplied with the high-voltage power supply potential VDD, advantages described below are obtained. - Without the second
thin film transistor 112 whose gate is supplied with the high-voltage power supply potential VDD, if a potential of the node A is raised by bootstrap operation, a potential of a source which is the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 increases to a value higher than the high-voltage power supply potential VDD. Then, the first terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 comes to serve as a source thereof. Therefore, in the eighththin film transistor 118, a large bias voltage is applied and thus significant stress is applied between a gate and a source and between a gate and a drain in the third period T3, which can cause deterioration in the thin film transistor. - If the second
thin film transistor 112 is provided whose gate is supplied with high-voltage power supply potential VDD, a potential of the node A is raised by bootstrap operation, but at the same time, an increase in a potential of the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 can be prevented. In other words, with the secondthin film transistor 112, a negative bias voltage applied between a gate and a source of the eighththin film transistor 118 can be reduced. Accordingly, with a circuit structure in this embodiment, a negative bias voltage applied between a gate and a source of the eighththin film transistor 118 can be reduced, so that deterioration in the eighththin film transistor 118, which is due to stress, can further be restrained. - Note that the second
thin film transistor 112 is provided so as to be connected, through the first terminal and the second terminal thereof, between the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 and the gate of the sixththin film transistor 116, or between the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 and the gate of the sevenththin film transistor 117. - Note that since the high-voltage power supply potential VDD is applied to the gate of the second
thin film transistor 112, the secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting in almost all the periods without application of a large amount of voltage between the gate and a source thereof. Therefore, when channel region of the thin film transistor is formed using an amorphous semiconductor, deterioration in the thin film transistor becomes pronounced, on the other hand, progress in deterioration can further be restrained with the use of microcrystalline silicon, which is a typical example of a microcrystalline semiconductor described in this embodiment, for channel regions of each transistor. Note that with a multi-gate structure where two or more gate electrodes are provided, the secondthin film transistor 112 can be redundant, thus, progress in the deterioration can further be restrained. - Note that although the gate of the second
thin film transistor 112 is supplied with high-voltage power supply potential VDD inFIG. 1D , it is acceptable as long as the gate of the secondthin film transistor 112 is supplied with a potential which brings the secondthin film transistor 112 into conduction.FIG. 28A shows an example of the structure where the gate of the secondthin film transistor 112 is connected to a thirdpower supply line 2801 to which a conduction holding potential VCC which brings the secondthin film transistor 112 into conduction is applied and which is provided aside from the firstpower supply line 131 to which the high-voltage power supply potential VDD is applied. Note that it is acceptable as long as the conduction holding potential VCC is in a magnitude relation as follows: VSS<VCC≤VDD, and progress in deterioration in the secondthin film transistor 112 can further be restrained in a manner that the conduction holding potential VCC is made smaller in value than the high-voltage power supply potential VDD. - Alternatively, a structure may be used where a twelfth
thin film transistor 2802 is added to the structure shown inFIG. 1D (seeFIG. 28B ). As for the twelfth thin film transistor 2082, a first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, the second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120; a second terminal is connected to the secondpower supply line 132; and a gate is connected to theseventh signal line 157. Note that the gate of the twelfththin film transistor 2802 may be connected to thesixth signal line 156. The twelfththin film transistor 2802 is conducting when the seventh signal line 157 (or the sixth signal line 156) supplies an H-level signal. In other words, in the third period T3 where the seventh signal line 157 (or the sixth signal line 156) supplies an H-level signal, a node to which the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, the second terminal of the ninththin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120 are connected, and the secondpower supply line 132 to which VSS is supplied are made to be conducting; thus, it is possible to more reliably bring the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 out of conduction. Therefore, malfunction of the driver circuit can be reduced. - Next, in the fourth period T4, the next stage signal Rin (SRout_2 in
FIG. 2B ) obtained from the pulse output circuit in the second stage becomes an H-level signal, and the ninththin film transistor 119 whose gate is connected to thefifth signal line 155 is thus conducting. At the time, the inverted clock signal CKB is an H-level signal, and the clock signal CK, the reset signal RES, and the previous stage signal Lin are L-level signals. The thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, the fifththin film transistor 115, and the elevenththin film transistor 121 are conducting. The secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the third period T3, and each gate of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 is set at VSS; thus, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 4B , and the potential of each wiring in the fourth period T4 is thus determined as inFIG. 2B . That is, in the fourth period T4, the first output signal Gout1 and the second output signal SRout1 are output as L-level signals. - Then, the fifth period T5 is described as a period T5-1 and a period T5-2. The polarities of the clock signal CK and the inverted clock signal CKB are different between in the period T5-1 and the period T5-2. First, the period T5-1 is described. In the period T5-1, the clock signal CK is an H-level signal, and the inverted clock signal CKB, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. The first
thin film transistor 111, the eighththin film transistor 111, the ninththin film transistor 119, and the tenththin film transistor 120 are non-conducting, and the gates of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are kept in a floating state as well as in the fourth period. That is, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state. Further, the secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T4, and the gates of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are set at VSS; thus, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Furthermore, the elevenththin film transistor 121 is conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow in FIC SA, and a potential of each of the wirings in the period T5-1 is determined as shown in FIG. SA. Next, in the period T5-2, the inverted clock signal CKB is an H-level signal, and the clock signal CK, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. As in the period T5-1, the firstthin film transistor 111, the eighththin film transistor 118, the ninththin film transistor 119, and the tenththin film transistor 120 are non-conducting; thus, the gates of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are kept in a floating state as well as in the fourth period. That is, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state. Further, the secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T4, and each gate of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are set at VSS; thus, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Furthermore, the elevenththin film transistor 121 is conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 5B , and the potentials of the wirings in the period T5-2 are determined as shown inFIG. 2B . That is, in the fifth period T5, the first output signal Gout1 and the second output signal SRout1 are output as L-level signals. - Note that a structure can be alternatively used where a
capacitor 2901 is added to the structure shown inFIG. 1D (seeFIG. 29 ). As for thecapacitor 2901, one electrode is connected to the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, the second terminal of thethin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120; and the other electrode is connected to the secondpower supply line 132. Thecapacitor 2901 holds a potential of a node to which the second terminal of the firstthin film transistor 111, the gate of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the gate of the fourththin film transistor 114, the gate of the fifththin film transistor 115, the second terminal of thethin film transistor 119, and the first terminal of the tenththin film transistor 120 are connected. That is, in the fifth period T5 where the seventh signal line 157 (or the sixth signal line) holds an L-level signal, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 hold a potential which allows them to be conducting more reliably. Therefore, malfunction of the driver circuit can be reduced. - The shift register in this embodiment separately has the
sixth signal line 156 and theseventh signal line 157, which respectively output the first output signal Gout and the second output signal SRout. Accordingly, the sixth thin film transistor and the seventh thin film transistor can differ in the size of the thin film transistor in response to the load on elements in the next stage of thesixth signal line 156 and theseventh signal line 157, and the delay in rising edge of signals can be restrained. In this case, the size of the thin film transistor means a ratio of W/L (W: channel width, and L: channel length) of the thin film transistor. Note that as shown inFIG. 6A , thesixth signal line 156 and theseventh signal line 157 may be integrated into thesignal line 166 which outputs the first output signal Gout and the second output signal SRout. Further, even if the eleventh thin film transistor is also removed at the same time, the same output signal can be obtained. Thesixth signal line 156 and theseventh signal line 157 are integrated and the eleventh thin film transistor is removed; thus, a reduction in the number of thin film transistors and in the number of wirings to which the inverted clock signal is input can be achieved. Accordingly, a reduction in the size of the shift register can be realized. - Note that in the circuit structure of the pulse output circuit in this embodiment, the eleventh
thin film transistor 121 is provided. With the elevenththin film transistor 121, the first output signal Gout of thesixth signal line 156 can have a shorter fall time. At the same time, there is no problem if the circuit structure of the pulse output circuit in this embodiment achieves the same operation as that shown inFIGS. 2A and 2B ,FIGS. 3A and 3B ,FIGS. 4A and 4B , andFIGS. 5A and 5B . For example, as shown in drawings, a structure can be used where a plurality of the firstpower supply lines 131 and/or the secondpower supply lines 132 is provided, and a plurality of high-voltage power supply potentials and/or low-voltage power supply potentials is supplied. For example, as shown inFIG. 6B , a wiring serving as the first power supply line may be divided into a plurality of lines, apower supply line 171 and apower supply line 172, which respectively supply a first high-voltage power supply potential VDD1 and a second high-voltage power supply potential VDD2. Further, if the first output signal Gout of thesixth signal line 156 can have a fall time sufficiently shortened by the elevenththin film transistor 121, the fifththin film transistor 115 does not need to shorten the fall time of the first output signal Gout of thesixth signal line 156. Therefore, inFIG. 6B , it is possible to set the first high-voltage power supply potential VDD1 supplied by thepower supply line 171 lower than the second high-voltage power supply potential VDD2 supplied by thepower supply line 172. As a result, it is possible to ease a shift in the threshold voltage of the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115. - Next, a structure of a thin film transistor included in the pulse output circuit is described. An n-channel thin film transistor has higher field-effect mobility than a p-channel thin film transistor. Therefore, in this embodiment, a structure of an n-channel thin film transistor is described.
-
FIG. 17 shows a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the thin film transistor. The thin film transistor shown inFIG. 17 has, over asubstrate 1101, agate electrode 1103, amicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a, amixed layer 1115 b, alayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, agate insulating layer 1105 provided between thegate electrode 1103 and themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a,impurity semiconductor layers 1127 serving as a source region and a drain region which are in contact with thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, andwirings 1125 which are in contact with theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127. - As the
substrate 1101, a glass substrate, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate with heat resistance which can withstand process temperature in manufacturing steps, or the like can be used. Alternatively, in the case where the substrate does not need a light-transmitting property, a substrate in which an insulating layer is provided on a surface of a substrate of a metal such as a stainless steel alloy may be used. As a glass substrate, for example, an alkali-free glass substrate formed using barium borosilicate glass, aluminoborosilicate glass, aluminosilicate glass, or the like may be used. Further, as thesubstrate 1101, the substrate may have any of the following sizes: the third generation (e.g., 550 mm×650 mm), the 3.5th generation (e.g., 600 mm×720 mm or 620 mm×750 mm), the fourth generation (e.g., 680 mm×880 mm or 730 mm×920 mm), the fifth generation (e.g., 1100 mm×1300 mm), the sixth generation (e.g., 1500 mm×1850 mm), the seventh generation (e.g., 1870 mm×2200 mm), the eighth generation (e.g., 2200 mm×2400 mm), the ninth generation (e.g., 2400 mm×2800 mm), the tenth generation (e.g., 2850 mm×3050 mm), and the like. - The
gate electrode 1103 can be a single layer or a stacked layer including a metal material such as molybdenum, titanium, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, aluminum, copper, neodymium, or scandium; or an alloy material containing any of these materials as a main component. Alternatively, an AgPdCu alloy or a semiconductor layer typified by polycrystalline silicon doped with an impurity element such as phosphorus may be used. - For example, as a two-layer structure of the
gate electrode 1103, the following structures are preferable: a two-layer structure of an aluminum layer and a molybdenum layer stacked thereover, a two-layer structure of a copper layer and a molybdenum layer stacked thereover, a two-layer structure of a copper layer and a titanium nitride layer or a tantalum nitride layer stacked thereover, and a two-layer structure of a titanium nitride layer and a molybdenum layer. As a three-layer structure of thegate electrode 1103, a stack of a tungsten layer or a tungsten nitride layer, a layer of an alloy of aluminum and silicon or an alloy of aluminum and titanium, and a titanium nitride layer or a titanium layer is preferable. When a metal layer functioning as a barrier layer is stacked over a layer with low electric resistance, electric resistance can be lowered and diffusion of a metal element from the metal layer into the semiconductor layer can be prevented. - Note that in order to improve adhesion between the
gate electrode 1103 and thesubstrate 1101, a nitride layer of any of the metal materials described above may be provided between thegate electrode 1103 and thesubstrate 1101. - The
gate insulating layer 1105 can be a single layer or a stacked layer of a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, or a silicon nitride oxide layer by CVD, sputtering, or the like. - Note that in this specification, silicon oxynitride refers to a material which contains more oxygen than nitrogen, and in the case where measurement is performed using Rutherford backscattering spectrometry (RBS) and hydrogen forward scattering (HFS), silicon oxynitride includes oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, and hydrogen as composition ranging from 50 to 70 atomic %, 0.5 to 15 atomic %, 25 to 35 atomic %, and 0.1 to 10 atomic %, respectively. Further, silicon nitride oxide refers to a material which contains more nitrogen than oxygen, and in the case where measurement is performed using RBS and HFS, silicon nitride oxide preferably includes oxygen, nitrogen, silicon, and hydrogen as composition ranging from 5 to 30 atomic %, 20 to 55 atomic %, 25 to 35 atomic %, and 10 to 30 atomic %, respectively. Note that percentages of nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, and hydrogen fall within the ranges given above if the total number of atoms contained in silicon oxynitride or silicon nitride oxide is defined as 100 atomic %.
- A microcrystalline semiconductor included in the
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a is a semiconductor having an intermediate structure between amorphous and crystalline structures (including single crystal and polycrystal). A microcrystalline semiconductor is a semiconductor having a third state that is stable in terms of free energy and is a crystalline semiconductor having short-range order and lattice distortion, in which columnar or needle-like crystals having a grain size of from 2 to 200 nm, preferably 10 to 80 nm, more preferably 20 to 50 nm have grown in a direction normal to the substrate surface. Therefore, a crystal grain boundary is formed at the interface of the columnar or needle-like crystals in some cases. - The Raman spectrum of microcrystalline silicon, which is a typical example of a microcrystalline semiconductor, shifts to a lower wavenumber side than 520 cm−1 which represents single crystal silicon. That is, the peak of the Raman spectrum of microcrystalline silicon is between 520 cm−1 which represents single crystal silicon and 480 cm−1 which represents amorphous silicon. Further, microcrystalline silicon contains hydrogen or halogen at a concentration of at least 1 atomic % to terminate a dangling bond. Moreover, microcrystalline silicon contains a rare gas element such as helium, argon, krypton, or neon to further promote lattice distortion, so that stability is increased and a favorable microcrystalline semiconductor can be obtained. Such a microcrystalline semiconductor is disclosed in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,409,134.
- Further, it is preferable that the concentration of oxygen and nitrogen contained in the
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry be less than 1×1018 atoms/cm3 because the crystallinity of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer 115 a can be improved. - Further, a semiconductor layer, which has lower energy at an urbach edge measured by constant photocurrent method (CPM) or photoluminescence spectroscopy and a smaller amount of absorption spectra of defects than a conventional amorphous semiconductor layer, is referred to as the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. - Note that amorphous silicon is a typical example of an amorphous semiconductor in the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. - In addition, the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor may include nitrogen or an NH group. -
FIGS. 18A and 18B each show an enlarged view of a region between thegate insulating layer 1105 and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 functioning as a source or drain region inFIG. 17 . Particularly, themixed layer 1115 b will be described in detail. - As shown in
FIG. 18A , themixed layer 1115 b is provided between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. In addition, themixed layer 1115 b includesmicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a andamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b filling the space except themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a. Specifically, themixed layer 1115 b includes themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a which protrudes from themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and theamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b which is formed using a similar kind of semiconductor as thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. Note that theamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b included in themixed layer 1115 b may include semiconductor crystal grains having a grain size from 1 nm to 10 nm, preferably, from 1 nm to 5 nm. - The
microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a are formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor and each have a conical or pyramidal shape or a projecting shape with a tip that narrows from thegate insulating layer 1105 to thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. Note that themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a may each have a conical or pyramidal shape or a projecting shape with a tip that widens from thegate insulating layer 1105 to thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. - As for the
mixed layer 1115 b, in the case where each of themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a have a projecting shape with a tip that narrows from thegate insulating layer 1105 to thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, themixed layer 1115 b on themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a side accounts for a larger microcrystalline semiconductor region than themixed layer 1115 b on thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor side. The reason thereof is as follows: although themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a grow in a thickness direction on a surface of themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a, when a gas whose source gas contains nitrogen is added, or when a flow ratio of hydrogen to silane is reduced to less than that in the deposition condition of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer and a gas whose source gas contains nitrogen is added as well, crystal growth of the semiconductor crystal grains in themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a is restrained, and the semiconductor crystal grains come to have a conical or pyramidal shape, and an amorphous semiconductor are eventually deposited. - Note that the
microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a included in themixed layer 1115 b are semiconductors the quality of which is approximately the same as the quality of themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a, while theamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b included in themixed layer 1115 b is a semiconductor the quality of which is approximately the same as the quality of thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor. Therefore, the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer and the layer containing an amorphous semiconductor is the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and theamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b in the mixed layer; thus, in other words, the interface between the microcrystalline semiconductor layer and the layer containing an amorphous semiconductor is uneven. - Since the
mixed layer 1115 b Includes themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a having a conical or pyramidal shape, resistance in the vertical direction (the thickness direction), that is, resistance between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 serving as a source or drain region can be reduced. - Accordingly, by forming the
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a serving as a channel region, and providing, between the channel region and theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 serving as a source region and a drain region, themixed layer 1115 b including themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a having a conical or pyramidal shape, and thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor formed using a well-ordered semiconductor layer which has fewer defects and whose tail slope of a level at a band edge in the valence band is steep, it is possible to reduce off-state-current of the thin film transistor and increase on-state-current and field-effect mobility. - In addition, as shown in FIC 18B, a structure is possible where the
mixed layer 1115 b is provided between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127, and thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not formed between themixed layer 1115 b and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127. In such a structure, it is preferable that themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a account for smaller region than theamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b. In this manner, off-state-current of the thin film transistor can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce resistance in the vertical direction (the thickness direction) in themixed layer 1115 b and resistance between a source region and a drain region, and to increase on-state-current of the thin film transistor. - In addition, the
mixed layer 1115 b preferably includes nitrogen, for a typical example, an NH group or an NH2 group. This is because defects are reduced when nitrogen, for a typical example, an NH group or an NH2 group is bonded with dangling bonds of silicon atoms at the interface between semiconductor crystal grains included in themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and at the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and theamorphous semiconductor region 1108 b. Accordingly, by setting the concentration of nitrogen at 1×1020 cm−3 to 1×1021 cm−3, the dangling bonds of silicon atoms can be easily cross-linked with nitrogen, preferably an NH group, so that carriers can flow easily. Alternatively, the dangling bonds of the semiconductor atoms at the aforementioned interfaces are terminated with the NH2 group, so that the defect level disappears. As a result, resistance in the vertical direction (the film thickness direction) at the time of the application of voltage between the source electrode and drain electrode of the thin film transistor which is in an on state is reduced. That is, field-effect mobility and on current of the thin film transistor are increased. - In addition, at the interface between the
microcrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and themicrocrystalline semiconductor region 1108 b, and at the interface between the semiconductor crystal grains, the defects which interfere with the carrier transfer can be reduced by a reduction in oxygen concentration in themixed layer 1115 b. - Note that, in this case, the
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a refers to a region having approximately uniform thickness. Further, the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and the mixed layer 111 b refers to a region where the region closest to thegate insulating layer 1105 is extended in a plain portion of the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a and themicrocrystalline semiconductor region 1108 b. - The total thickness of the
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a and themixed layer 1115 b, that is, the distance from the interface between thegate insulating layer 1105 and themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a to each of the tips of themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a is from 3 nm to 80 nm, preferably from 5 nm to 30 nm, whereby off-state-current of the TFT can be reduced. - The
impurity semiconductor layer 1127 is formed using amorphous silicon to which phosphorus is added, microcrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added, or the like. Note that in the case where a p-channel thin film transistor is formed as the thin film transistor, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 is made of microcrystalline silicon to which boron is added, amorphous silicon to which boron is added, or the like. Note that when ohmic contact is formed between themixed layer 1115 b and thewirings 1125 or between thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and thewirings 1125, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 is not necessarily formed. - In addition, in the case where the
impurity semiconductor layer 1127 is formed using microcrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added or microcrystalline silicon to which boron is added, characteristics of the interface can be improved by a formation of a microcrystalline semiconductor layer, for a typical example, a microcrystalline silicon layer between themixed layer 1115 b and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 or between thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127. In such a manner, it is possible to reduce resistance at the interface between themixed layer 1115 b and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 or between thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127. As a result, it is possible to increase an amount of a current flowing through a source region, themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a, themixed layer 1115 b, and thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor, and a drain region, which are included in the thin film transistor; thus, an increase in on-state-current and the field-effect mobility can be realized. -
Wirings 1125 illustrated inFIG. 19 can be a single layer or a stacked layer including aluminum, copper, titanium, neodymium, scandium, molybdenum, chromium, tantalum, tungsten, or the like. Alternatively, an aluminum alloy to which an element for preventing generation of hillocks is added (e.g., an Al—Nd alloy which can be used for the gate electrode 1103) may be used. A layer may have a stacked-layer structure in which a layer on a side which is in contact with theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 is formed using titanium, tantalum, molybdenum, tungsten, or nitride of any of these elements and aluminum or an aluminum alloy is formed thereover. Further, a stacked layer structure may be used in which upper and lower surfaces of aluminum or an aluminum alloy may be sandwiched between any of titanium, tantalum, molybdenum, tungsten, or nitride thereof. - With the thin film transistor shown in
FIGS. 18A and 18 b, andFIG. 19 , off-state-current can be reduced and on-state-current and the field-effect mobility can be increased. Further, since the channel region is formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor layer, fewer deterioration and higher reliability in electric characteristics can be realized. Moreover, since on-state-current is high, a reduction in an area of the channel region, that is, an urea occupied by the thin film transistor is smaller, and integration level of the thin film transistor is thus higher than with a thin film transistor whose channel region is formed using an amorphous silicon. -
FIG. 19 shows a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the thin film transistor. The thin film transistor shown inFIG. 19 includes thegate electrode 1103 over thesubstrate 1101, thegate insulating layer 1105 which covers thegate electrode 1103, amicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 which functions as a channel region and is in contact with thegate insulating layer 1105, a pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor over themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131, and theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 which function as a source region and a drain region and are in contact with the pair oflayers 1132 containing an amorphous semiconductor. Further, the thin film transistor shown inFIG. 19 includeswirings 1125 which are in contact with theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 and function as a source electrode and a drain electrode. In addition, a first insulatinglayer 1135 a is formed over a surface of themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131. Further, second insulatinglayers 1135 c are formed over surfaces of the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor and surface of theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127. Furthermore, third insulatinglayers 1135 e are formed over surfaces of thewirings 1125. - A first
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 a in contact with thegate insulating layer 1105, and a secondmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b having a plurality of conical or pyramidal protrusions (projections) are formed in the firstmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131. - The
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 is formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor which is similar to themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a described inEmbodiment 1. The secondmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b can be formed in a manner similar to themicrocrystalline semiconductor regions 1108 a included in themixed layer 1115 b described inEmbodiment 1. - In a manner similar to the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor described inEmbodiment 1, the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor can be formed using a well-ordered semiconductor which has fewer defects and whose tail slope of a level at a band edge in the valence band is steeper than a conventional amorphous semiconductor layer. - The first insulating
layer 1135 a is formed using an oxide layer formed by oxidizing themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131, a nitride layer formed by nitriding themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131, an oxynitride layer or a nitride oxide layer formed by nitriding and oxidizing themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131, or the like. As a typical example of the first insulatinglayer 1135 a, a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, a silicon nitride oxide layer, or the like can be used. - The second insulating
layers 1135 c are formed using oxide layers formed by oxidizing the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127, nitride layers formed by nitriding the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127, oxynitride layers or nitride oxide layers formed by nitriding and oxidizing the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127, theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127, or the like. As a typical example of the second insulatinglayers 1135 c, silicon oxide layers, silicon nitride layers, silicon oxynitride layers, silicon nitride oxide layers, or the like can be used. - The third
insulating layers 1135 e are formed using oxide layers formed by oxidizing thewirings 1125, nitride layers formed by nitriding thewirings 1125, oxynitride layers or nitride oxide layers formed by nitriding and oxidizing thewirings 1125, or the like. Note that although the third insulatinglayers 1135 e are formed on top surfaces and side surfaces of thewirings 1125 in this case, the third insulatinglayers 1135 e may be formed only on side surfaces of thewirings 1125 and are not necessarily be formed on top surfaces of thewirings 1125. As a typical example of the third insulatinglayers 1135 e, metal oxide layers, metal nitride layers, metal oxynitride layers, metal nitride oxide layers, or the like can be used. In this case, the metal refers to any of the metal elements in the description of thewirings 1125. - The pair of
layers 1132 includes an amorphous semiconductor and thus has a weak n-type conductivity. In addition, the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor has lower density than themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131. Therefore, the second insulatinglayers 1135 c formed by oxidizing or nitriding the amorphous semiconductor layer are nondense insulating layers having low density and a low insulating property. However, in the thin film transistor described in this embodiment, the first insulatinglayer 1135 a formed by oxidizing themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 is formed on a back channel side. The microcrystalline semiconductor layer has higher density than the amorphous semiconductor layer, and the first insulatinglayer 1135 a thus has also high density and a high insulating property. Further, the second insulatinglayer 1131 b has a plurality of conical or pyramidal protrusions (projections) and thus has an uneven surface. Therefore, a leak path between a source region and a drain region has a long distance. Accordingly, a reduction in off-state-current of the thin film transistor can be realized. - In the thin film transistor described in this embodiment, a microcrystalline semiconductor layer having a plurality of conical or pyramidal protrusions is used for a channel region, and a pair of layers containing an amorphous semiconductor are formed in contact with the microcrystalline semiconductor layer; therefore, a larger amount of on-state-current can be obtained than in a thin film transistor in which an amorphous semiconductor is used for a channel region, and a smaller amount of off-state-current can be obtained than in a thin film transistor in which a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region.
- By the use of a thin film transistor, as shown in
Structure 1 andStructure 2 described above, in which a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region as the thin film transistor included in the pulse output circuit, degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, and deterioration in the display quality can be restrained. Further, in the case where a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a semiconductor layer of the thin film transistor, productivity can be improved, and an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can thus be achieved - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, an embodiment of a driver circuit having a structure which is different from the structure in the above embodiment is described.
- Driver circuits which function as shift registers are described with reference to
FIGS. 7A to 7C ,FIGS. 8A and 8B ,FIGS. 9A and 9B ,FIGS. 10A and 10B , andFIG. 30 . Ashift register 700 includes first to J-th pulse output circuits 701_1 to 701_J (J is preferably a multiple of 4, which is 4 or more) (seeFIG. 7A ). Unlike the embodiment above, a first clock signal CK1 from afirst wiring 702, a second clock signal CK2 from asecond wiring 703, a third clock signal CK3 from athird wiring 704, a fourth clock signal CK4 from afourth wiring 705, and a reset signal RES from afifth wiring 706 are input to each of the stages of the first to J-th pulse output circuits 701_1 to 701_J of theshift register 700 shown inFIG. 7A . Further, a start pulse SP or a signal from a pulse output circuit in the previous stage (referred to as the previous stage signal Lin) is input to each of the plurality of pulse output circuits. Furthermore, a signal from a pulse output circuit in the next stage (referred to as the next stage signal Rin) is input to each of the plurality of pulse output circuits. Moreover, the pulse output circuit in each stage outputs a first output signal Gout which is output to a gate line, a data line, etc. and outputs a second output signal SRout which is output to the pulse output circuit in the previous and/or the pulse output circuit in the next stage. Note that a dummy stage of the pulse output circuit, which outputs a signal which does not contribute to display in a display portion, may be provided. For example, in a structure where the pulse output circuit is used as a shift register in a gate driver and outputs pulses sequentially to n gate lines, J stages (n≤J) may be satisfied. - Note that the first clock signal CK1 to the fourth clock signal CK4 sequentially deviate (are sequentially delayed) by a fourth of a cycle. Specifically, a (J−2)th clock signal CK2 is advanced from a (J−3)th clock signal CK1 by a fourth of a cycle, a (J−1)th clock signal CK3 is advanced from the (J−2)th clock signal CK2 by a fourth of a cycle, a J-th clock signal CK4 is advanced from the (J−1)th clock signal CK3 by a fourth of a cycle, the J-th clock signal CK4 is advanced from the (J−3)th clock signal by a fourth of a cycle. As shown in
FIG. 7B , as for the pulse output circuit 701_1 in a first stage, which is an example of a (J−3)th stage, a clock signal CK_N (in this case, N is 1) is input to a first terminal; the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal; any of the first to fourth clock signals (in this case, CK2) which is different from the clock signal input to the first terminal is input to a third terminal; the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal; the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal; the first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal; and the second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal. As for the pulse output circuit 7012 in a second stage, which is an example of a (J−2)th stage, a clock signal CK_N (in this case, N is 2) is input to a first terminal; the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal; any of the first to fourth clock signals (in this case, CK3) which is different from the clock signal input to the first terminal is input to a third terminal; the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal; the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal; the first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal; and the second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal. As for the pulse output circuit 7013 in a third stage, which is an example of a (J−1)th stage, a clock signal CK_N (in this case, N is 3) is input to a first terminal; the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal; any of the first to fourth clock signals (in this case, CK3) which is different from the clock signal input to the first terminal; the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal; the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal; the first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal; and the second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal. As for the pulse output circuit 701_4 in a fourth stage, which is an example of the J-th stage, a clock signal CK_N (in this case, N is 4) is input to a first terminal; the reset signal RES is input to a second terminal; any of the first to fourth clock signals (in this case, CK4) which is different from the clock signal input to the first terminal is input to a third terminal; the previous stage signal Lin is input to a fourth terminal; the next stage signal Rin is input to a fifth terminal; the first output signal Gout is output from a sixth terminal; and the second output signal SRout is output from a seventh terminal. Note that the first clock signal CK1 to the fourth clock signal CK4 become H-level signals (high power supply potential level) and L-level signals (low power supply potential level) repeatedly at a regular interval. - Next, an example of a specific circuit structure of the pulse output circuit is described with reference to
FIG. 7C . Note that an example of the structure of the pulse output signal in the (J−3)th stage is described below with reference toFIG. 7C . Note that the plurality of pulse output circuits differ from each other in that the terminals to which any of the first to fourth clock signals CK1 to CK4 is input are changed, as described above. As shown inFIG. 7C , the circuit structure of the pulse output circuit is similar to that of the pulse out put circuit described inEmbodiment 1 with reference toFIG. 1D , and the explanation given above is thus incorporated herein. - Next, operation of the shift register shown in
FIGS. 7A to 7C is described with reference toFIGS. 8A and 8B ,FIGS. 9A and 9B ,FIGS. 10A and 10B ,FIGS. 11A and 11B . Note that for explanation, as shown inFIG. 8A , a connection node of the second terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112, the gate of the sixththin film transistor 116, and the gate of the sevenththin film transistor 117 is denoted by a node A in a manner similar to that inEmbodiment 1. Further, in order to specifically describe the operation of the shift register, a first period T1, a second period T2, a third period T3, a fourth period T4, and a fifth period T5, which are shown in a timing chart inFIG. 8B , are separately used for explanation. Note that in the following description, the first to elevenththin film transistors 111 to 121 are N-channel thin film transistors and are in a conduction state when voltage (Vgs) between the gate and the source exceeds a threshold voltage (Vth). Note that inFIG. 8B , the first to elevenththin film transistors 111 to 121 used for a shift register included in a gate driver, and aperiod 201 is a vertical retrace period and aperiod 202 is a gate selection period. Further, in the timing chart inFIG. 8B shows specific examples of the waveforms of the first clock signal CK1, the second clock signal CK2, the third clock signal CK3, the fourth clock signal CK4, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, the next stage signal Rin, and the second output signal SRout of each stage (e.g., SRout1 of the first stage). Furthermore, the high power supply potential level and the low power supply potential level of each signal are VDD and VSS, respectively. In addition, a first output signal Gout1 is omitted here because it has a waveform which is the same as that of the second output signal SRout1. - A difference between the structure described in this embodiment and the structure described in
Embodiment 1 is the cycle of charge and discharge that each of the clock signals (the first to fourth clock signals CK1 to CK4) repeats. In this embodiment, the number of charges and discharges of each clock signal can be made approximately half of that of a clock signal CK and the inverted clock signal CKB inEmbodiment 1. Therefore, a reduction in frequency of a clock signal can be achieved, and a reduction in power consumption can be realized. In particular, in a driver circuit of a large display device, parasitic capacitance, gate capacitance, or the like of each wiring is increased. By a reduction in the number of charges and discharges of a clock signal used for a shift register to be driven, it is possible to shorten a time for the rising (a shift from VSS to VDD) or the falling (a shift from VDD to VSS) of a signal used for storing electricity in each wiring. Therefore, a driver circuit of a display device which is capable of high quality displays can be obtained. - In the first period T1, the reset signal RES becomes an H-level signal and the first
thin film transistor 111 whose gate is connected to thesecond signal line 152 is conducting. At the time, the second clock signal CK2, the first clock signal CK1, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. As shown inFIG. 9A , after the firstthin film transistor 111 is conducting, the secondthin film transistor 112, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 9A , and the potential of each wiring in the first period T1 is determined as shown inFIG. 8B . That is, the first period T1 is a period during which the potential of each wiring in the pulse output circuit is reset (to VSS). In addition, in the first period T1, an L-level signal is output as the second output signal SRout. - When the reset signal RES is input to the gate of the first
thin film transistor 111 every vertical retrace period which is theperiod 201, the potential of each of the thin film transistors can be set at VSS. Therefore, a so-called dynamic circuit, which is described in this embodiment and which is driven with the use of a node in a floating state, can initialize each node, whereby noise immunity and operation reliability can be improved to be equal to those of a static circuit. - Next, in the second period T2, the previous stage signal Lin is an H-level signal, and the eighth
thin film transistor 118 and the tenththin film transistor 120 whose gates are each connected to thefourth signal line 154 are thus conducting. At the time, the first clock signal CK1, the second clock signal CK2, the reset signal RES, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. Further, at the time, the eighththin film transistor 118 is conducting, as illustrated inFIG. 9B . The secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the first period 71, and a current flows, as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 9B . At the time, the node A uses the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 as the source; therefore, a potential of the node A becomes a value VDD-Vth obtained by subtraction of the threshold voltage Vth of the eighththin film transistor 118 from a value of a potential of the firstpower supply line 131. When the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 is VDD-Vth, thethin film transistor 118 are non-conducting and the node A enters into a floating state while maintaining VDD-Vth. Note that as shown inFIG. 9B , since the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are conducting, and since thefirst signal line 151 is VSS, the potential of each wiring in the second period T2 is determined as inFIG. 9B . That is, the second period T2 is a period during which the node A in the pulse output circuit is brought into a floating state. In addition, in the second period T2, an L-level signal is output as the second output signal SRout1. - Next, in the third period T3, the first clock signal CK1 becomes an H-level signal. At the time, the second clock signal CK2, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. Further, at the time, as shown in
FIG. 10A , the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are conducting, that is, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are in a state where current flows between a source and a drain (a dotted arrow inFIG. 10A ), and a potential of each second terminal (the source side) of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 starts to increase. There is capacitive coupling due to parasitic capacitance between a gate and a source of each of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117, so that a potential of a gate of the node A in a floating state increases as a potential of the second terminal serving as the source increases (bootstrap operation). A potential of the node A eventually becomes higher than VDD+Vth, and the second terminal of each of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 thus has a potential of VDD. Therefore, an H-level signal is output as the second output signal SRout1 in the third period T3, that is, a potential of the node A in a floating state is raised by the bootstrap operation and the first output signal Gout1 and the second output signal SRout1 are output as H-level signals. Then, the second output signal SRout1 is input as the previous stage signal Lin in the pulse output circuit in the second stage. - Note that as shown in
FIG. 8B , with the secondthin film transistor 112 whose gate is supplied with high-voltage power supply potential VDD, advantages described below are obtained. - Without the second
thin film transistor 112 whose gate is supplied with high-voltage power supply potential VDD, if a potential of the node A is raised by bootstrap operation, a potential of a source which is the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 increases to a value higher than the high power supply potential VDD. Then, the first terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 comes to serve as the source thereof. Therefore, in the eighththin film transistor 118, a large amount of bias voltage is applied and thus great stress is applied between a gate and a source and between the gate and a drain in the third period T3, which can cause deterioration in the thin film transistor. - With the second
thin film transistor 112 whose gate is supplied with high-voltage power supply potential VDD, the potential of the node A is raised by bootstrap operation, but at the same time, an increase in the potential of the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 can be prevented. In other words, with the secondthin film transistor 112, the level of a negative bias voltage applied between a gate and a source of the eighththin film transistor 118 can be lowered. Accordingly, with the circuit structure in this embodiment, the level of a negative bias voltage applied between a gate and a source of the thin film transistor can be lowered, so that deterioration in the eighththin film transistor 118, which is due to stress, can further be suppressed. - Note that the second
thin film transistor 112 are provided so as to be connected, through the first terminal and the second terminal of the secondthin film transistor 112, between the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 and the gate of the sixththin film transistor 116, or between the second terminal of the eighththin film transistor 118 and the gate of the sevenththin film transistor 117. - Note that the second
thin film transistor 112 may be connected to the thirdpower supply line 2801 to which conduction holding potential VCC shown in FIC. 28A is supplied in a manner similar to that ofEmbodiment 1. Alternatively, a twelfththin film transistor 2802 shown inFIG. 28B may be provided - Next, in the fourth period T4, the next stage signal Rin (SRout_2 in
FIG. 2B ) obtained from the pulse output circuit in the second stage becomes an H-level signal, and the ninththin film transistor 119 whose gate is connected to thefifth signal line 155 is thus conducting. At the time, the second clock signal CK2 is an H-level signal, and the first clock signal CK1, the reset signal RES, and the previous stage signal Lin are L-level signals. The thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, the fifththin film transistor 115, and the elevenththin film transistor 121 are conducting. The secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the third period T3, and each gate of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 is set at VSS; thus, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 are non-conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 10B , and the potential of each wiring in the fourth period T4 is thus determined as inFIG. 8B . That is, in the fourth period T4, the first output signal Gout1 and the second output signal SRout1 are L-level signals. - Note that in the fourth period T4, a signal used for the eleventh
thin film transistor 121 to be conducting (in this case, the second clock signal CK2) is supplied, so that a potential of thesixth signal line 156 which outputs Gout falls rapidly. Therefore, a driver circuit with fewer malfunction can be obtained. Further, since the load on the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce deterioration in the thin film transistors. Note that as shown inFIG. 30 , the elevenththin film transistor 121 is formed using a plurality of eleventh thin film transistors 121_1 to 121_3, and clock signals different from clock signals supplied to the first signal line 151 (in this case, the second clock signal CK2, the third clock signal CK3, and the fourth clock signal CK4) are supplied from third signal lines 153_1 to 153_3 to the eleventh thin film transistors 121_1 to 121_3. Further, the eleventh thin film transistors 121_1 to 121_3 are controlled to be conducting or not to be conducting and the load on the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce deterioration in the thin film transistors. - Then, the fifth period T5 is described as a period T5-1 and a period T5-2, in which the H-level signals or the L-level signals of the first clock signal CK1 and the third clock signal CK3 are input in combination. First, the period T5-1 is described. In the period T5-1, the first clock signal CK1 is an H-level signal or an L-level signal, and the third clock signal CK3, the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. The first
thin film transistor 111, the eighththin film transistor 118, the ninththin film transistor 119, and the tenththin film transistor 120 are non-conducting, and the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 enter into a floating state while maintaining the same gate potentials as in the fourth period. That is, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state. Further, the secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T4, and the gate potential of each of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 is set at VSS; thus, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 is non-conducting. Furthermore, the elevenththin film transistor 121 is non-conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 11A , and the potential of each wiring in the period T5-1 is determined as shown inFIG. 11A . Next, in the period T5-2, the first clock signal CK1 is an H-level signal or an L-level signal, the third clock signal CK3 is an H-level signal, and the reset signal RES, the previous stage signal Lin, and the next stage signal Rin are L-level signals. As in the period T5-1, the firstthin film transistor 111, the eighththin film transistor 118, the ninththin film transistor 119, and the tenththin film transistor 120 are non-conducting; thus, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 enter into a floating state while maintaining the same gate potentials as in the fourth period. That is, the thirdthin film transistor 113, the fourththin film transistor 114, and the fifththin film transistor 115 are kept in a conduction state. Further, the secondthin film transistor 112 is conducting as in the fourth period T4, and gate potential of each of the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 is set at VSS; thus, the sixththin film transistor 116 and the sevenththin film transistor 117 is non-conducting. Furthermore, the elevenththin film transistor 121 is conducting. Therefore, a current flows as shown by a dotted arrow inFIG. 11B , and the potential of each wiring in the period T5-2 is determined as shown inFIG. 8B . That is, in the fifth period T5, L-level signals are output as the first output signal Gout1 and the second output signal SRout1. - Note that a structure can be used where the
capacitor 2901 is added, in a manner similar to that of the structure shown inEmbodiment 1 with reference toFIG. 29 . - Note that as described in
Structure 1 andStructure 2 inEmbodiment 1, by the use of a thin film transistor in which a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region as the thin film transistor included in the pulse output circuit described in this embodiment, degradation in characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, and deterioration in the display quality can be restrained. Further, in the case where a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a semiconductor layer of the thin film transistor, productivity can be improved. Thus, an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, examples of a display element, a display device which is a device having a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device which is a device having a light-emitting element are described. Note that a display element, a display device which is a device having a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device which is a device having a light-emitting element can employ a variety of types and can include a variety of elements. For example, a display medium whose contrast, luminance, reflectivity, transmittance, or the like is changed by electromagnetic action, such as an EL (electroluminescent) element (e.g., an EL element including organic and inorganic materials, an organic EL element, or an inorganic EL element), an LED (e.g., a white LED, a red LED, a green LED, or a blue LED), a transistor which emits light depending on the amount of current), an electron emitter, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, a grating light valve (GLV), a plasma display panel (PDP), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, or a carbon nanotube can be used as a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device. Note that display devices having EL elements include an EL display; display devices having electron emitters include a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: surface-conduction electron-emitter display), and the like; display devices having liquid crystal elements include a liquid crystal display (e.g., a transmissive liquid crystal display, a transflective liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct-view liquid crystal display, or a projection liquid crystal display); and display devices having electronic ink include electronic paper.
- First, an example of a system block of a liquid crystal display device is described with reference to
FIG. 12A . The liquid crystal display device includes acircuit 5361, asource driver 5362, a gate driver 5363_1, a gate driver 5363_2, apixel portion 5364, acircuit 5365, and alighting device 5366. A plurality ofwirings 5371 which are extended from thesource driver 5362 and a plurality ofwirings 5372 which are extended from the gate drivers 5363_1 and 5363_2 are provided in thepixel portion 5364. Moreover,pixels 5367 which include display elements such as liquid crystal elements are provided in a matrix in respective regions where the plurality ofwirings 5371 and the plurality ofwirings 5372 is provided in matrix. - The
circuit 5361 has a function of supplying a signal, voltage, current, or the like to thesource driver 5362, the gate driver 5363_1, the gate driver 5363_2, and thecircuit 5365 in response to avideo signal 5360 and functions as a controller, a control circuit, a timing generator, a power supply circuit, a regulator, or the like. In this embodiment, for example, thecircuit 5361 supplies a signal line driver circuit start signal (SSP), a signal line driver circuit clock signal (SCK), a signal line driver circuit inverted clock signal (SCKB), video signal data (DATA), or a latch signal (LAT) to thesource driver 5362. Alternatively, as an example, thecircuit 5361 supplies a scan line driver circuit start signal (GSP), a scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK), or a scan line driver circuit inverted clock signal (OCKB) to the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2. Further alternatively, thecircuit 5361 supplies a backlight control signal (BLC) to thecircuit 5365. Note that this embodiment is not limited thereto, and thecircuit 5361 can supply various other signals, voltages, currents, or the like to thesource driver 5362, the gate driver 5363_1, the gate driver 5363_2, and thecircuit 5365. - The
source driver 5362 has a function of outputting video signals to the plurality ofwirings 5371 in response to a signal supplied from the circuit 5361 (e.g., SSP, SCK, SCKB, DATA, or LAT), and functions as a signal line driver circuit. The gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2 each have a function of outputting scan signals to the plurality ofwirings 5372 in response to a signal supplied from the circuit 5361 (e.g., GSP, GCK, or OCKB), and functions as a scan line driver circuit. Thecircuit 5365 has a function of controlling the luminance (or the average luminance) of thelighting device 5366 by controlling the amount of electric power supplied to thelighting device 5366, time to supply the electric power to thelighting device 5366, or the like in accordance with the signal (BLC) supplied from thecircuit 5361. Thecircuit 5365 can function as a power supply circuit. - Note that when video signals are input to the plurality of
wirings 5371, the plurality ofwirings 5371 can function as signal lines, video signal lines, source lines, or the like. When scan signals are input to the plurality ofwirings 5372, the plurality ofwirings 5372 functions as signal lines, scan lines, gate lines, or the like. - Note that when the same signal is input to the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2 from the
circuit 5361, scan signals output from the gate driver 5363_1 to the plurality ofwirings 5372 and scan signals output from the gate driver 5363_2 to the plurality ofwirings 5372 have approximately the same timings in many cases. Accordingly, load caused by driving of the gate drivers 5363_1 and 5363_2 can be reduced. Thus, the display device can be made larger. Alternatively, the display device can have higher definition. Alternatively, since the channel width of thin film transistors included in the gate drivers 5363_1 and 5363_2 can be reduced, a display device with a narrower frame can be obtained. Note that this embodiment is not limited thereto, and thecircuit 5361 can supply different signals to the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2. - Note that one of the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2 can be eliminated.
- Note that a wiring such as a capacitor line, a power supply line, or a scan line can be additionally provided in the
pixel portion 5364. Then, thecircuit 5361 can output a signal, a voltage, or the like to such a wiring. Further, a circuit similar to the gate driver 5363_1 or the gate driver 5363_2 can be additionally provided. The additionally provided circuit can output a signal such as a scan signal to the additionally provided wiring. - Note that the
pixel 5367 can include a light-emitting element such as an EL element as a display element. In that case, as illustrated inFIG. 12B , since the display element can emit light, thecircuit 5365 and thelighting device 5366 can be eliminated. Moreover, in order to supply electric power to the display element, a plurality of wirings 5373 which can function as power supply lines can be provided in thepixel portion 5364. Thecircuit 5361 can apply a power supply voltage called voltage (ANO) to the wirings 5373. The wirings 5373 can be separately connected to the pixels in accordance with color elements or can be connected to all the pixels. - Note that
FIG. 12B shows an example in which thecircuit 5361 supplies different signals to the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2. Thecircuit 5361 supplies a signal such as a scan line driver circuit start signal (GSP1), a scan line driver circuit clock signal (OCK1), or a scan line driver circuit inverted clock signal (GCKB1) to the gate driver 5363_1. In addition, thecircuit 5361 supplies a signal such as a scan line driver circuit start signal (GSP2), a scan line driver circuit clock signal (GCK2), or a scan line driver circuit inverted clock signal (GCKB2) to the gate driver 5363_2. In that case, the gate driver 5363_1 can scan only wirings in odd-numbered rows of the plurality ofwirings 5372 and the gate driver 5363_2 can scan only wirings in even-numbered rows of the plurality ofwirings 5372. Accordingly, the driving frequency of the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2 can be lowered, whereby power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, the area in which a flip-flop of one stage can be laid out can be made larger. Thus, a display device can have higher definition. Alternatively, the size of a display device can be increased. Note that this embodiment is not limited thereto, and thecircuit 5361 can output the same signal to the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2 as inFIG. 12A . - Note that as in
FIG. 12B , thecircuit 5361 can supply different signals to the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2 inFIG. 12A . - The above is the description of one example of the system block of the display device.
- Next, examples of structures of the display device will be described with reference to
FIGS. 13A to 13D . - In
FIG. 13A , circuits which have a function of outputting signals to the pixel portion 5364 (e.g., thesource driver 5362, the gate driver 5363_1, and the gate driver 5363_2) are formed over asubstrate 5380 where thepixel portion 5364 is also formed. In addition, thecircuit 5361 is formed over a substrate which is different from the substrate where thepixel portion 5364 is formed. In this manner, since the number of external components is reduced, a reduction in cost can be achieved. Alternatively, since the number of signals or voltages input to thesubstrate 5380 is reduced, the number of connections between thesubstrate 5380 and the external component can be reduced. Accordingly, an improvement in reliability or an increase in yield can be achieved. - Note that in the case where the circuit is formed over a substrate which is different from the substrate where the
pixel portion 5364 is formed, the substrate can be mounted on a flexible printed circuit (FPC) by tape automated bonding (TAB). Alternatively, the substrate can be mounted on thesame substrate 5380 as thepixel portion 5364 by chip on glass (COG). - In the case where the circuit is formed over a different substrate from the
pixel portion 5364, a transistor formed using a single crystal semiconductor can be formed on the substrate. Therefore, the circuit formed over the substrate can have advantages such as an improvement in driving frequency, an improvement in driving voltage, or a reduction in variation in output signals. - Note that a signal, voltage, current, or the like is input from an external circuit through an
input terminal 5381 in many cases. - In
FIG. 13B , circuits with low driving frequency (e.g., the gate driver 5363_1 and the gate driver 5363_2) are formed over thesubstrate 5380 where thepixel portion 5364 is formed. In addition, thecircuit 5361 and thesource driver 5362 are formed over a substrate which is different from the substrate where thepixel portion 5364 is formed. In this manner, the circuit formed over thesubstrate 5380 can be constituted by thin film transistors with lower field-effect mobility as compared to that of a transistor formed using a single crystal semiconductor (also referred to as a MOS transistor). Thus, a microcrystalline semiconductor can be used for a channel region of the thin film transistor. Accordingly, an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in the number of steps, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved. - Note that as illustrated in
FIG. 13C , part of the source driver 5362 (asource driver 5362 a) can be formed over thesubstrate 5380 where thepixel portion 5364 is formed, and the other part of the source driver 5362 (asource driver 5362 b) can be formed over a substrate which is different from the substrate where thepixel portion 5364 is formed. Thesource driver 5362 a often includes a circuit which can be formed using a thin film transistor with low field-effect mobility (e.g., a shift register, a selector, or a switch). Thesource driver 5362 b often includes a circuit which is preferably formed using a MOS transistor with high field-effect mobility and few variations in characteristics (e.g., a shift register, a latch circuit, a buffer circuit, a DA converter circuit, or an AD converter circuit). Accordingly, as inFIG. 13B , a microcrystalline semiconductor can be used for a channel region of the thin film transistor. Further, the number of external components can be reduced. - In
FIG. 13D , part of the circuit 5361 (acircuit 5361 a) is formed over thesubstrate 5380 over which thepixel portion 5364 is formed, and the other part of the circuit 5361 (acircuit 5361 b) is formed over a substrate which is different from the substrate where thepixel portion 5364 is formed. Thecircuit 5361 a often includes a circuit which can be formed using a thin film transistor with lower field-effect mobility as compared to that of a MOS transistor (e.g., a switch, a selector, or a level shift circuit). Moreover, thecircuit 5361 b often includes a circuit which is preferably formed using a MOS transistor with high field-effect mobility and few variations (e.g., a shift register, a timing generator, an oscillator, a regulator, or an analog buffer). - Note that also in
FIGS. 13A to 13C , thecircuit 5361 a can be formed over the same substrate as thepixel portion 5364, and thecircuit 5361 b can be formed over a substrate which is different from the substrate where thepixel portion 5364 is formed. - Here, for the gate drivers 5363_1 and 5363_2, any of the shift registers in
Embodiment - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, an example of a source driver is described.
- An example of a source driver is described with reference to
FIG. 14A . The source driver includes a plurality of circuits 602_1 to 602_N (Nis a natural number), acircuit 600, and acircuit 601. The circuits 602_1 to 602_N each include a plurality of thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k (k is a natural number). The thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k have the same conductivity type as the thin film transistors included in the pulse output circuit in the shift register described in the embodiment above. - The relation of connection in the source driver is described taking the circuit 602_1 as an example. Each first terminal of the thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k is connected to a wiring 605_1. Second terminals of the thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k are connected to wirings S1 to Sk, respectively. Gates of the thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k are respectively connected to wirings 604_1 to 604_k. For example, the first terminal of the thin film transistor 603_1 is connected to the wiring 605_1; a second terminal of the thin film transistor 603_1 is connected to the wiring S1; and the gate of the thin film transistor 603_1 is connected to the wiring 604_1.
- The
circuit 600 has a function of supplying signals to the circuits 602_1 to 602_N through the wirings 604_1 to 604_k and can function as a shift register, a decoder, or the like. The signals are digital signals in many cases and can function as a selection signals. The wirings 604_1 to 604_k can function as signal lines. - The
circuit 601 has a function of outputting signals to the circuits 602_1 to 602_N and can function as video signal generation circuits or the like. For example, thecircuit 601 supplies the signal to the circuit 602_1 through the wiring 605_1 and simultaneously supplies the signal to the circuit 602_2 through the wiring 6052. The signals are digital signals in many cases and can function as a selection signals. The wirings 605_1 to 605_k can function as signal lines. - The circuits 602_1 to 602_N each have a function of selecting a wiring to which an output signal of the
circuit 601 is output and can thus function as selector circuits. For example, the circuit 602_1 has a function of selecting from among the wirings S1 to Sk which wiring to output a signal which is intended to be output from thecircuit 601 to the wiring 605_1. - The transistors 603_1 to 603_N have a function of controlling a conduction state between the wiring 6051 and each of the wirings S1 to Sk in accordance with an output signal from the
circuit 600 and function as switches. - Next, operation of the source driver shown in
FIG. 14A is described with reference to a timing chart inFIG. 14B .FIG. 14B shows examples of a signal 614_1 input to the wiring 604_1, a signal 6142 input to the wiring 604_2, a signal 614_k input to the wiring 604_k, a signal 615_1 input to the wiring 605_1, and a signal 615_2 input to the wiring 6052. - Note that one operation period of the source driver corresponds to one gate selection period in a display device. One gate selection period is a period during which a pixel in a row is selected and a video signal can be written to the pixel.
- Note that one gate selection period is divided into a period T0 and a period T1 to a period Tk. The period T0 is a period during which a precharge voltage is simultaneously applied to pixels in a selected row, and can be a precharge period. Each of the periods T1 to Tk is a period during which video signals are written to pixels in a selected row, and can be a write period.
- Note that for simplicity, operation of the source driver is described taking operation of the circuit 602_1 as an example.
- First, in the period T0, the
circuit 600 outputs H-level signals to the wirings 604_1 to 604_k. Accordingly, the thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k each have electrical continuity between the source and the drain, whereby the wiring 605_1 and the wirings S1 to Sk are conducting. At the time, thecircuit 601 applies a precharge voltage Vp to the wiring 605_1, so that the precharge voltage Vp is output to the wirings S1 to Sk through the thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k, respectively. Then, the precharge voltage Vp is written to the pixels in a selected row, so that the pixels in the selected row are precharged. - Next, in the period T1, the
circuit 600 outputs an H-level signal to the wiring 604_1. Accordingly, the thin film transistor 6031 has electrical continuity between the source and the drain, whereby the wiring 605_1 and the wiring S1 are conducting. Moreover, the wiring 605_1 and the wirings S2 to Sk are non-conducting. At the time, if thecircuit 601 outputs a signal Data (S1) to the wiring 605_1, the signal Data (S1) is output to the wiring S1 through the thin film transistors 603_1. In this manner, the signal Data (S1) is written to, among pixels connected to the wiring S1, pixels in the selected row. - Next, in the period T2, the
circuit 600 outputs an H-level signal to the wiring 604_2. Accordingly, the thin film transistor 603_2 has electrical continuity between the source and the drain, whereby the wiring 605_2 and the wiring S2 are conducting. Moreover, the wiring 6051 and the wirings S1 are non-conducting, and the wiring 605_1 and the wirings S3 to Sk remain in a non-conduction state. At the time, if thecircuit 601 outputs a signal Data (S2) to the wiring 605_1, the signal Data (S2) is output to the wiring S2 through the thin film transistor 6032. In this manner, the signal Data (S2) is written to, among the pixels connected to the wiring S2, the pixels in the selected row. - After that, the
circuit 600 sequentially outputs H level signals to the wirings 604_1 to 604_k until the end of the period Tk, so that thecircuit 600 sequentially outputs the H level signals to the wirings 604_3 to 604_k from the period T3 to the period Tk, as in the period T1 and the period T2. Therefore, the transistors 603_3 to 603_k sequentially have electrical continuity between the source and the drain; thus, the thin film transistors 603_1 to 603_k sequentially have electrical continuity between the source and the drain. Accordingly, signals output from thecircuit 601 are sequentially output to the wirings S1 to Sk. In this manner, the signals can be sequentially written to the pixels in the selected row. - The above is the description of an example of the source driver. Since the source driver in this embodiment includes the circuit functioning as a selector, the number of signals or the number of wirings can be reduced. Further, since a precharge voltage is written to a pixel before a video signal is written to the pixel (in the period T0), a write time of the video signal can be shortened. Accordingly, an increase in the size of a display device and higher resolution of the display device can be achieved. However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and the period T0 may be eliminated so that the pixel is not precharged.
- Note that if k is too large, a write time for the pixel is shortened, whereby writing of a video signal to the pixel is not completed in the write time in some cases. Accordingly, k≤6 is preferable; k≤3 is more preferable, and k=2 is much more preferable.
- In specific, in the case where a color element of a pixel is divided into n (n is a natural number), it is possible td set k=n. For example, in the case where a color element of a pixel is divided into red (R), green (G), and blue (B), it is possible to set k=3. In that case, one gate selection period is divided into a period T0, a period T1, a period T2, and a period T3. A video signal can be written to the pixel of red (R), the pixel of green (G), and the pixel of blue (B) in the period T1, the period T2, and the period T3, respectively. However, this embodiment is not limited thereto, and the order of the period T1, the period T2, and the period T3 can be set as appropriate.
- In specific, in the case where a pixel is divided into n sub-pixels (also referred to as subpixels) (n is a natural number), it is possible to set k=n. For example, in the case where the pixel is divided into two sub-pixels, it is possible to set k=2. In that case, one gate selection period is divided into the period T0, the period T1, and the period T2. A video signal can be written to one of the two sub-pixels in the period T1, and a video signal can be written to the other of the two sub-pixels in the period T2.
- Note that since the driving frequency of the
circuit 600 and the circuits 602_1 to 602_N is low in many cases, thecircuit 600 and the circuits 602_1 to 602_N can be formed over the same substrate as a pixel portion. Accordingly, the number of connections between the substrate over which the pixel portion is formed and an external circuit can be reduced; thus, an increase in yield, an improvement in reliability, or the like can be achieved. - Note that the shift register described in
Embodiment 1 orEmbodiment 2 can be used as thecircuit 600. In that case, if all the thin film transistors included in thecircuit 600 are n-channel transistors, a microcrystalline semiconductor can be used for a semiconductor layer of the thin film transistor. Accordingly, an increase in the size of a display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved. Further, by the use of a microcrystalline semiconductor for a semiconductor layer, degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, so that the life of a display device can be extended. - Note that not only the thin film transistors included in the
circuit 600 but also all the thin film transistors included in the circuits 602_1 to 602_N can be the same conductivity type. Accordingly, when thecircuit 600 and the circuits 602_1 to 602_N are formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion, a reduction in the number of steps, an increase in yield, or a reduction in cost can be achieved. Further, by the use of a microcrystalline semiconductor for a semiconductor layer, degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, so that the life of the display device can be extended. - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, structures and operation of pixels which can be used in a liquid crystal display device are described.
-
FIG. 15A illustrates an example of a pixel. Apixel 5420 includes a thin film transistor 5321, aliquid crystal element 5422, and acapacitor 5423. A first terminal of the thin film transistor 5321 is connected to awiring 5431. A second terminal of the thin film transistor 5321 is connected to one electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422 and one electrode of thecapacitor 5423. A gate of thethin film transistor 5421 is connected to awiring 5432. The other electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422 is connected to anelectrode 5434. The other electrode of thecapacitor 5423 is connected to awiring 5433. - Note that a liquid crystal element is an element which controls transmission or non-transmission of light by optical modulation action of liquid crystals and includes a pair of electrodes and liquid crystals. Note that the optical modulation action of liquid crystals is controlled by an electric field applied to the liquid crystals (including a horizontal electric field, a vertical electric field, and a diagonal electric field). Note that the following can be used for a liquid crystal element: a nematic liquid crystal, a cholesteric liquid crystal, a smectic liquid crystal, a discotic liquid crystal, a thermotropic liquid crystal, a lyotropic liquid crystal, a low-molecular liquid crystal, a high-molecular liquid crystal, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal (PDLC), a ferroelectric liquid crystal, an anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal, a main-chain liquid crystal, a side-chain high-molecular liquid crystal, a plasma addressed liquid crystal (PALC), a banana-shaped liquid crystal, and the like. In addition, the following can be used as a diving method of a liquid crystal: a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an STN (super twisted nematic) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an FFS (fringe field switching) mode, an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode, a PVA (patterned vertical alignment) mode, an ASV (advanced super view) mode, an ASM (axially symmetric aligned microcell) mode, an OCB (optically compensated birefringence) mode, an ECB (electrically controlled birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (anti-ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, a PDLC (polymer dispersed liquid crystal) mode, a guest-host mode, a blue phase mode, and the like.
- A video signal is input to the
wiring 5431, for example. A scan signal, a selection signal, or a gate signal is input to thewiring 5432, for example. A constant voltage is applied to theelectrode 5433, for example. A constant voltage is applied to thewiring 5434, for example. Note that this embodiment is not limited to this. A write time of a video signal can be shortened by supply of precharge voltage to thewiring 5431. Alternatively, voltage applied to theliquid crystal element 5422 can be controlled by input of a signal to thewiring 5433. Alternatively, frame inversion driving can be realized by input of a signal to theelectrode 5434. - Note that the
wiring 5431 functions as a signal line, a video signal line, or a source line. Thewiring 5432 functions as a signal line, a scan line, or a gate line. Thewiring 5433 functions as a power supply line or a capacitor line. Theelectrode 5434 functions as a common electrode or a counter electrode. Theelectrode 5434 functions as a common electrode or a counter electrode. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. In the case where voltage is supplied to thewiring 5431 and thewiring 5432, these wirings function as power supply lines. Alternatively, in the case where a signal is input to thewiring 5433, thewiring 5433 functions as a signal line. - The
thin film transistor 5421 has a function of controlling timing when a video signal is written to a pixel by controlling the conduction state of thewiring 5431 and one electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422, and can function as a switch. Thecapacitor 5423 has a function of keeping voltage applied to theliquid crystal element 5422 as a stable value by storing the potential difference between one electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422 and thewiring 5433, and functions as a storage capacitor. Note that this embodiment is not limited to this. -
FIG. 15B shows an example of a timing chart showing operation of the pixel inFIG. 15A .FIG. 15B illustrates a signal 5442_j (j is a natural number), a signal 5442_j+1, a signal 5441_i (i is a natural number), a signal 5441_i+1, and avoltage 5442. In addition,FIG. 15B illustrates a k-th (k is a natural number) frame and a (k+1)th frame. Note that the signal 5442_j, the signal 5442_j+1, the signal 5441_i, the signal 5441_i+1, and thevoltage 5442 are examples of a signal input to thewiring 5432 in a J-th row, a signal input to thewiring 5432 in a (j+1)th row, a signal input to thewiring 5431 in an i-th column, a signal input to thewiring 5431 in an (i+1)th column, and a voltage supplied to thewiring 5432, respectively. - Operation of the
pixel 5420 in the j-th row and the i-th column is described. When the signal 5442_j is set at an H level, thethin film transistor 5421 has electrical continuity between the source and the drain. Accordingly, thewiring 5431 in the i-th column and one electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422 are conducting, so that the signal 3041_j is input to the one electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422 through thethin film transistor 5421. Then, thecapacitor 5423 keeps the potential difference between one electrode of theliquid crystal element 5422 and thewiring 5433. Thus, after that, a voltage applied to theliquid crystal element 5422 is constant until the signal 5422J is set at the H level again. Then, theliquid crystal element 5422 expresses gray levels corresponding to the applied voltage. - Note that
FIG. 15B shows an example of the case where a positive signal and a negative signal are alternately input to thewiring 5431 every selection period. A positive signal is a signal whose potential is higher than a reference value (e.g., a potential of the electrode 5434). A negative signal is a signal whose potential is lower than a reference value (e.g., a potential of the electrode 5434). However, this embodiment is not limited to this, and signals with the same polarity can be input to thewiring 5431 in one frame period. - Note that
FIG. 15B shows an example of the case where the polarity of the signal 5441_i and the polarity of the signal 5441_i+1 are different from each other. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. The polarity of the signal 5441_i and the polarity of the signal 5441_i+1 can be the same. - Note that
FIG. 15B shows an example of the case where a period during which the signal 5442_j is at the H level and a period during which the signal 5442_j+1 is at the H level do not overlap with each other. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. As illustrated inFIG. 15C , the period during which the signal 5442_j is at the H level and the period during which the signal 5442_j+1 is at the H level can overlap with each other. In that case, signals of the same polarity are preferably supplied to thewiring 5431 in one frame period. In this manner, pixels in a (j+1)th row can be precharged by using the signal 5441_j written to pixels in the j-th row. Accordingly, a writing time of a video signal to a pixel can be shortened. Therefore, a high-definition display device can be obtained. Alternatively, a display portion of the display device can be made large. Alternatively, since the signals of the same polarity are input to thewiring 5431 in one frame period, power consumption can be reduced. - Note that by a combination of a pixel structure shown in
FIG. 16A and the timing chart shown inFIG. 15C , dot inversion driving can be achieved. In the pixel structure inFIG. 16A , a pixel 5420 (i,j) is connected to a wiring 5431_i. On the other hand, a pixel 5420(i, j+1) is connected to awiring 5431_i+ 1. That is, pixels in the i-th column are alternately connected to the wiring 5431_i and the wiring 5431_i+1 row-by-row. In this manner, since a positive signal and a negative signal are alternately written to the pixels in the i-th column row-by-row, dot inversion driving can be achieved. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. The pixels, which are in the i-th column, of every plural rows (e.g., two rows or three rows) can be alternately connected to the wiring 5431_i and thewiring 5431_i+ 1. - Note that a sub-pixel structure can be used as the pixel structure.
FIG. 16B and 16C each illustrate a structure of the case where a pixel is divided into two sub-pixels.FIG. 16B shows a sub-pixels structure called 1S+2G, andFIG. 16C shows a sub-pixel structure called 2S+1G. A sub-pixel 5420A and a sub-pixel 5420B correspond to thepixel 5420. Athin film transistor 5421A and athin film transistor 5421B correspond to thethin film transistor 5421. Aliquid crystal element 5422A and aliquid crystal element 5422B correspond to theliquid crystal element 5422. Acapacitor 5423A and acapacitor 5423B correspond to thecapacitor 5423. Awiring 5431A and awiring 5431B correspond to thewiring 5431. Awiring 5432A and a wiring 5432B correspond to thewiring 5432. - Here, by a combination of the pixel in this embodiment and any of the structures described in
Embodiments 1 to 4, a variety of advantages can be obtained. For example, in the case where a sub-pixel structure is employed for the pixel, the number of signals required for driving a display device is increased. Therefore, the number of gate lines or source lines is increased. As a result, the number of connections between a substrate over which a pixel portion is formed and an external circuit is greatly increased in some cases. However, even if the number of gate lines is increased, a scan line driver circuit and the pixel portion can be formed over the same substrate, as described inEmbodiment 3. Accordingly, the pixel with the sub-pixel structure can be used without a great increase in the number of connections between the substrate over which the pixel portion is formed and the external circuit. Alternatively, even if the number of source lines is increased, the use of the source driver inEmbodiment 4 can reduce the number of source lines. Accordingly, the pixel with the sub-pixel structure can be used without greatly increasing the number of connections between the substrate over which the pixel portion is formed and the external circuit. - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, a method for manufacturing the thin film transistor shown in
Embodiment 1 is described with reference toFIGS. 20A to 20C ,FIGS. 21A to 21C ,FIGS. 22A and 22B ,FIGS. 23A to 23C ,FIGS. 24A and 24B , andFIGS. 25A to 25C . - Here, it is preferable that all the thin film transistors formed over the same substrate have the same polarity because the number of manufacturing steps can be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, a method for manufacturing an n-channel thin film transistor is described.
- First, a process for manufacturing the thin film transistor shown in
FIG. 17 is described with reference toFIGS. 20A to 20C . As shown inFIG. 20A , thegate electrode 1103 is formed over thesubstrate 1101. Next, after the formation of thegate insulating layer 1105 which covers thegate electrode 1103, afirst semiconductor layer 1106 is formed. - The
gate electrode 1103 can be formed in such a manner that a conductive layer is formed over thesubstrate 1101 with the use of the material described inEmbodiment 1 by sputtering or vacuum evaporation; a mask is formed over the conductive layer by a photolithography technique, an inkjet method, or the like; and the conductive layer is etched with the use of the mask. Alternatively, thegate electrode 1103 can be formed in a manner that a conductive nanopaste of silver, gold, copper, or the like is deposited over the substrate by an inkjet method and the conductive nanopaste is baked. Here, thegate electrode 1103 is formed in a way that a conductive layer is formed over thesubstrate 1101 and the conductive layer is etched with a resist mask formed with the use of a photomask. - Note that, in a photolithography step, a resist may be applied to an entire surface over a substrate. Alternatively, a resist is printed by a printing method on a region in which a resist mask is intended to be formed, and then, the resist is exposed to light, whereby a resist can be saved, and cost can be reduced. Instead of exposing a resist to light by using a light-exposure machine, a laser beam direct drawing apparatus may be used to expose a resist to light.
- When side surfaces of the
gate electrode 1103 are tapered, disconnection of the semiconductor layer and the wiring layer formed over thegate electrode 1103 at a step portion can be prevented. In order that the side surfaces of thegate electrode 1103 be tapered, etching may be performed while the resist mask is being receded. - Through the step of forming the
gate electrode 1103, a gate wiring (a scan line) and a capacitor wiring can also be formed concurrently. Note that a scan line refers to a wiring for selecting a pixel, and a capacitor wiring refers to a wiring which is connected to one of electrodes of a capacitor in a pixel. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. Thegate electrode 1103 and either one or both a gate wiring and a capacitor wiring may be formed separately. - The
gate insulating layer 1105 can be formed using the material described inEmbodiment 1 by CVD, sputtering, or the like. In addition, thegate insulating layer 1105 may be formed using a microwave plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus with a high frequency (1 GHz or higher). When thegate insulating layer 1105 is formed by a microwave plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus, withstand voltage between a gate electrode and each of a drain electrode and a source electrode can be improved. Thus, a highly reliable thin film transistor can be obtained. Further, by forming a silicon oxide layer as thegate insulating layer 1105 by CVD using an organosilane gas, the crystallinity of the microcrystalline semiconductor layer which is formed later can be improved and the on-state-current and the field-effect mobility of the thin film transistor can be increased. As the organosilane gas, a compound containing silicon, such as tetraethyl orthosilicate tetraethoxysilane (TEOS) (chemical formula: Si(OC2H5)4), tetramethylsilane (TMS) (chemical formula: Si(CH3)4), tetramethylcyclotetrasiloxane (TMCTS), octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane (OMCTS), hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS), triethoxysilane (SiH(OC2H5)3), or trisdimethylaminosilane (SiH(N(CH3)2)3), can be used. - The
first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed using microcrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon germanium, microcrystalline germanium, or the like. Thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 is formed with a thickness of 3 nm to 10 nm, preferably 3 nm to 5 nm, so that in a second semiconductor layer to be formed in a later process, the length of a plurality of conical or pyramidal projections formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor can be controlled and on-state-current and the field-effect mobility of the thin film transistor can be increased. - The
first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium and hydrogen in a treatment chamber of a plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus. Alternatively, thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium, hydrogen, and a rare gas such as helium, neon, or krypton. Microcrystalline silicon, microcrystalline silicon germanium, microcrystalline germanium, or the like is formed using a mixture of the deposition gas containing silicon or germanium and hydrogen, which is obtained by diluting the deposition gas with hydrogen whose flow rate is 10 to 2000 times, preferably 50 to 200 times as high as that of the deposition gas. - Typical examples of the deposition gas containing silicon or germanium are SiH4, Si2H6, GeH4, Ge2H6, and the like.
- A rare gas such as helium, argon, neon, krypton, or xenon is used as a source gas for the
first semiconductor layer 1106, whereby the deposition rate of thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 can be increased. In addition, as the deposition rate is increased, the amount of impurities mixed in thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 is reduced; thus, the crystallinity of thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 can be improved. Accordingly, the on-state-current and field-effect mobility of the thin film transistor can be increased and productivity of the thin film transistor can also be increased. - When the
first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed, glow discharge plasma is generated by application of a high frequency power of 3 to 30 MHz, typically, a high frequency power of 13.56 MHz or 27.12 MHz in the HF band, or a high frequency power of approximately 30 to 300 MHz in the VHF band, typically 60 MHz. Alternatively, glow discharge plasma is generated by applying high frequency power of a microwave of 1 GHz or higher. With the use of high frequency power in the VHF band or at a microwave frequency, the deposition rate can be increased. In addition, high frequency power in the HF band is superimposed with high frequency power in the VHF band, whereby unevenness of plasma in a large-sized substrate is also reduced, the uniformity can be increased, and the deposition rate can be increased. - Note that before the
first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed, impurity elements in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus are removed by introducing a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium with gas in the treatment chamber exhausted, so that the amount of impurities in thegate insulating layer 1105 and thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 of a thin film transistor to be formed later can be reduced. Thus, electric characteristics of the thin film transistor can be improved. - Next, as shown in
FIG. 20B , a semiconductor layer is stacked over thefirst semiconductor layer 1106, so that asecond semiconductor layer 1107 is formed. Then, animpurity semiconductor layer 1109 and aconductive layer 1111 are formed over thesecond semiconductor layer 1107. After that, a resistmask 1113 is formed over theconductive layer 1111. - The
second semiconductor layer 1107 including amicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a, amixed layer 1107 b, and alayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor is formed under a condition that part of the crystal region grows with thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 used as a seed crystal. Note that in this case, for convenience, a structure in which thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 includes thefirst semiconductor layer 1106, that is, a structure in which thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 is included in themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a is described. - The
second semiconductor layer 1107 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon or germanium, hydrogen, and a gas containing nitrogen in a treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus. As examples of the gas containing nitrogen, there are ammonia, nitrogen, nitrogen fluoride, nitrogen chloride, and the like. - At this time, a condition for forming a microcrystalline semiconductor layer is used for the flow rate ratio of the deposition gas including silicon or germanium to hydrogen in a manner similar to formation of the
first semiconductor layer 1106, and in addition, the gas including nitrogen is used for a source gas, whereby crystal growth can be reduced as compared with the case of forming thefirst semiconductor layer 1106. As a result, themixed layer 1107 b and thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor, which is formed with a semiconductor layer having a small number of defects and a steep tail slope of a level at a band edge in the valence band, can be formed in thesecond semiconductor layer 1107. - Here, a typical example of a condition for forming a microcrystalline semiconductor layer is as follows: The flow rate ratio of hydrogen is 10 to 2000 times, preferably, 10 to 200 times that of the deposition gas including silicon or germanium.
- A rare gas such as helium, neon, argon, xenon, or krypton is introduced into a source gas for the
second semiconductor layer 1107, whereby the deposition rate of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 can be increased. - In an early stage of deposition of the
second semiconductor layer 1107, thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 serves as a seed crystal and a microcrystalline semiconductor layer is deposited over the entire area over the first semiconductor layer 1106 (an early stage of deposition). After that, since the gas containing nitrogen is included in the source gas, crystal growth is partially suppressed and conical or pyramidal microcrystalline semiconductor region is formed and an amorphous semiconductor region is formed (a middle stage of the deposition). Further, crystal growth of the conical or pyramidal microcrystalline semiconductor region stops and a layer including an amorphous semiconductor is formed (a later stage of the deposition). - Accordingly, the
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a illustrated inFIG. 17 andFIGS. 19A and 18B corresponds to thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 inFIG. 20A and a microcrystalline semiconductor layer which is formed in the early stage of deposition of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107, i.e., themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a inFIG. 20B . - Further, the
mixed layers 1115 b illustrated inFIG. 17 andFIGS. 18A and 18B correspond to a layer which includes the conical or pyramidal microcrystalline semiconductor regions and regions filling the space except the conical or pyramidal microcrystalline regions and is formed in a middle stage of deposition of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 inFIG. 20B , i.e., themixed layer 1107 b. - The
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor shown inFIG. 17 andFIGS. 18A and 18B corresponds to thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor, which is formed in a later stage of deposition of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 shown inFIG. 20B . - In the
second semiconductor layer 1107 formed by such a method, the nitrogen concentration which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry has a peak in the vicinity of the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and themixed layer 1107 b and is constant in a direction in which themixed layer 1107 b and thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor are deposited. - The
impurity semiconductor layer 1109 is formed by glow discharge plasma with a mixture of a deposition gas containing silicon, hydrogen, and phosphine (diluted with hydrogen or silane) in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus. Amorphous silicon to which phosphorus is added or microcrystalline silicon to which phosphorus is added is formed by diluting the deposition gas including silicon with hydrogen. - The
conductive layer 1111 can be formed using a material similar to that of thewirings 1125 shown inFIG. 17 . Theconductive layer 1111 is formed by CVD, sputtering, or vacuum evaporation. Alternatively, theconductive layer 1111 may be formed by discharging a conductive nanopaste of silver, gold, copper, or the like by a screen printing method, an inkjet method, or the like and baking the conductive nanopaste. - The second resist
mask 1113 is formed by a photolithography process. The second resistmask 1113 has regions with different thicknesses. Such a resist mask can be formed using a multi-tone mask. By using the multi-tone mask, the number of photomasks used and the number of manufacturing steps can be reduced, which is preferable. In this embodiment, the multi-tone mask can be used in a step of forming a pattern of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 and a step of separating the semiconductor layer into a source region and a drain region. - A multi-tone mask is a mask capable of light exposure with multi-level light intensity, typically, with three levels of light intensity so that an exposed region, a semi-exposed region, and an unexposed region are formed. With the use of the multi-tone mask, a resist mask with plural thicknesses (typically two kinds of thicknesses) can be formed by one-time exposure and a development process. Therefore, with the use of the multi-tone mask, the number of photomasks can be reduced.
-
FIGS. 22A-1 and 22B-1 are cross-sectional views of typical multi-tone masks.FIG. 22A-1 shows a gray-tone mask 1180, andFIG. 22B-1 shows a half-tone mask 1185. - The gray-
tone mask 1180 shown inFIG. 22A-1 includes a light-blockingportion 1182 formed using a light-blocking layer on a light-transmittingsubstrate 1181, and adiffraction grating portion 1183 provided with a pattern of the light-blocking layer. - The
diffraction grating portion 1183 has slits, dots, meshes, or the like provided at intervals which are less than or equal to the resolution limit of light used for exposure, so that light transmittance is controlled. Note that the slits, dots, or meshes provided at thediffraction grating portion 1183 may be provided periodically or non-periodically. - For the light-transmitting
substrate 1181, quartz or the like can be used. The light-blocking layer included in the light-blocking portion 182 and thediffraction grating portion 1183 is formed using chromium, chromium oxide, or the like. - In the case where the gray-
tone mask 1180 is irradiated with light for exposure, as shown inFIG. 22A-2 , transmittance in a region overlapping with the light-blockingportion 1182 is 0%, and transmittance in a region where the light-blockingportion 1182 or the diffraction grating portion 183 is not provided is 100%. Further, transmittance at thediffraction grating portion 1183 is approximately in the range of 10 to 70%, which can be adjusted by the interval of slits, dots, or meshes of the diffraction grating, or the like. - The half-
tone mask 1185 shown inFIG. 22B-1 includes a semi-light-transmittingportion 1187 formed using a semi-light-transmitting layer on a light-transmittingsubstrate 1186, and a light-blockingportion 1188 formed using a light-blocking layer. - The semi-light-transmitting
portion 1187 can be formed using a layer of MoSiN, MoSi, MoSiO, MoSiON, CrSi, or the like. The light-blockingportion 1188 may be formed using a metal which is similar to that of the light-blocking layer of the gray-tone mask, and is preferably formed using chromium, chromium oxide, or the like. - In the case where the half-
tone mask 1185 is irradiated with light for exposure, as illustrated inFIG. 22B-2 , transmittance in a region overlapping with the light-blockingportion 1188 is 0%, and transmittance in a region where neither the light-blockingportion 1188 nor the semi-light-transmittingportion 1187 is provided is 100%. Further, transmittance at the semi-light-transmittingportion 1187 is approximately in the range of 10 to 70%, which can be adjusted by the kind, thickness, or the like of a material to be used. - By performing exposure using the multi-tone mask and development, a resist mask having regions with different thicknesses can be formed.
- Next, with the use of the second resist
mask 1113, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1109, and theconductive layer 1111 are etched. Through this step, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1109, and theconductive layer 1111 are separated into each element to form asecond semiconductor layer 1115, animpurity semiconductor layer 1117, and aconductive layer 1119. Note that thesecond semiconductor layer 1115 includes themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a, themixed layer 1115 b, and alayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor (seeFIG. 20C ). - Next, separated third resist
masks 1123 are formed with the second resistmask 1113 eroded. Ashing using oxygen plasma may be performed in order that the resist mask recede. Here, ashing is performed on the second resistmask 1113 so that the resistmask 1113 is separated over the gate electrode. Thus, the third resistmasks 1123 can be formed (seeFIG. 21A ). - Next, the
conductive layer 1111 is etched using the third resistmasks 1123, so that thewirings 1125 functioning as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed (seeFIG. 21B ). It is preferable that theconductive layer 1111 be removed by wet etching. By wet etching, the conductive layer is isotropically etched. Accordingly, the conductive layer recedes to an inner side than those of the resistmasks 1123, so that thewirings 1125 are formed. Thewiring 1125 functions not only as a source electrode or a drain electrode but also as a signal line. However, this embodiment is not limited to this. The signal line may be provided separately from the source electrode and the drain electrode. - Next, with the use of the third resist
masks 1123, thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 are partly etched. Here, dry etching is used. Up to this step, anamorphous semiconductor layer 1129 c having a depression on its surface, and theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 functioning as a source and drain regions are formed. After that, the third resistmasks 1123 are removed (seeFIG. 21C ). - Note that, here, after the
conductive layer 1111 is etched by wet etching, each of thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 is partly etched by dry etching. Thus, theconductive layer 1119 is isotropically etched, and side surfaces of thewirings 1125 are not aligned with side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127. That is, the side surfaces of theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 are formed on an outer side than the side surfaces of thewirings 1125. - Alternatively, the
impurity semiconductor layer 1117 and thelayers 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor may be partly etched after removal of the third resist masks 1123. By the etching, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched using thewirings 1125, so that the side surfaces of thewirings 1125 are approximately aligned with the side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127. - Next, dry etching may be performed after the third resist
masks 1123 are removed. The condition of dry etching is set so that the exposedlayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged and an etching rate with respect to thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is low. In other words, a condition which gives almost no damages to the exposedlayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor and hardly reduces the thickness of the exposedlayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is used. As an etching gas, Cl2, CF4, N2, or the like is typically used. Further, there is no particular limitation on an etching method, and an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) method, a capacitively coupled plasma (CCP) method, an electron cyclotron resonance (ECR) method, a reactive ion etching (RIE) method, or the like can be used. - Next, a surface of
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor containing an amorphous semiconductor may be irradiated with water plasma, ammonia plasma, nitrogen plasma, or the like. - Water plasma treatment can be performed in such a manner that a gas containing water as a main component typified by water vapor (H2O vapor) is introduced into a reaction space so that plasma is generated.
- As described above, dry etching is further performed under a condition where the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged after theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 are formed, so that an impurity element such as a residue existing on the exposedlayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be removed. Further, water plasma treatment is performed after the dry etching, so that a residue of the resist mask can be removed. By the water plasma treatment, insulation between the source region and the drain region can be ensured. Thus, in a thin film transistor which is completed, the amount of off-state current can be reduced, and variation in electric characteristics can be reduced. - Through these steps, a thin film transistor with a channel region formed using a microcrystalline semiconductor layer can be manufactured with the use of fewer masks. Further, the thin film transistor having a small amount of off-state-current, a large amount of on-state-current, and high field-effect mobility can be manufactured.
- A method for manufacturing a thin film transistor, which is different from in
Method 1, is described with reference toFIGS. 20A to 20C ,FIGS. 23A to 23C , andFIGS. 24A and 24B . - In a manner similar to
Method 1, thegate electrode 1103 is formed over thesubstrate 1101. Next, thegate insulating layer 1105 and thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 are formed so as to cover the gate electrode 1103 (seeFIG. 20A ). Then, in a manner similar toMethod 1, crystals are grown from thefirst semiconductor layer 1106, whereby thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 including (themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a, themixed layer 1107 b, and thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor) is formed. Then, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1109 is formed over the second semiconductor layer 1107 (seeFIG. 23A ). After that, a resist mask (not shown) is formed over theimpurity semiconductor layer 1109. - Next, with the use of the resist mask, the
second semiconductor layer 1107 and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1109 are etched. Through this step, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1109 are separated into each element, so that the second semiconductor layer 1115 (including themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1115 a, themixed layer 1115 b, and thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor) and theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 are formed (seeFIG. 23B ). - Next, the
conductive layer 1111 is formed over thegate insulating layer 1105, the second semiconductor layer: 1115, and the impurity semiconductor layer 1117 (seeFIG. 23C ). - Next, a resist mask (not shown) is formed over the
conductive layer 1111, and theconductive layer 1111 is etched with the use of the resist mask, so thatwirings 1133 functioning as a source and drain electrodes are formed (seeFIG. 24A ). - Next, the
impurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched so that theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 functioning as a source and drain regions are formed. Further, thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is etched so that thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is formed (seeFIG. 24B ). - Through the above steps, the thin film transistor can be manufactured.
- Note that the
layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is partly etched without removal of the resist mask after forming thewirings 1133; however, part of theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 and part of thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor may be etched after removal of the resist mask. By the etching, theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched using thewirings 1133 as masks, so that side surfaces of thewirings 1133 are approximately aligned with side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127. - Next, dry etching is preferably performed after the resist mask is removed. The condition of dry etching is set so that the exposed
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged and an etching rate with respect to thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is low. In other words, a condition that a surface of the exposedlayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is hardly damaged and the thickness of the exposedlayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is hardly decreased is used. - Next, the surface of the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor may be irradiated with water plasma, ammonia plasma, nitrogen plasma, or the like. - Water plasma treatment can be performed in such a manner that a gas containing water as a main component typified by water vapor (H2O vapor) is introduced into a reaction space so that plasma is generated.
- As described above, dry etching is further performed under a condition where the
layer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is not damaged after thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor is formed, so that an impurity element such as a residue existing on thelayer 1129 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be removed. Further, water plasma treatment is performed after the dry etching, so that a residue of the resist mask can be removed. By the water plasma treatment, insulation between the source region and the drain region can be ensured. Thus, in a thin film transistor, the amount of off-state current can be reduced, and variation in electric characteristics can be reduced. - Next, a method for manufacturing the thin film transistor shown in
FIG. 19 is described with reference toFIGS. 20A to 20C ,FIGS. 21A to 21C , andFIGS. 25A to 25C . - In a manner similar to
Method 1, after thewirings 1125 are formed through the steps inFIGS. 20A to 20C ,FIG. 21A , andFIG. 21B , theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 is etched so that theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127 are formed. Further thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is etched so that a pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor is formed (seeFIG. 25A ). - Here, a condition is used as appropriate under which the
layer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is selectively etched by wet etching or dry etching so that the secondmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b is exposed. As a typical example of an etchant which enables wet etching whereby an amorphous semiconductor layer can selectively be etched, an etchant including hydrazine, potassium hydroxide, or ethylenediamine can be used. Alternatively, an etchant including a mixed solution of hydrofluoric acid and nitric acid can be used. Alternatively, a tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide (also referred to as TMAH) aqueous solution can be used. - In addition, hydrogen can be used as an etching gas which enables dry etching whereby an amorphous semiconductor layer can selectively be etched. Alternatively, a gas containing chlorine, bromine, or iodine can be used as the etching gas. As typical example, hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, hydrogen iodide, silicon tetrachloride, phosphorus trichloride, boron trichloride or the like can be used. Alternatively, a gas containing fluorine can be used as the etching gas. As a typical example, tetrafluoromethane, sulfur hexafluoride, nitrogen trifluoride, silicon tetrafluoride, boron trifluoride, xenon difluoride, chlorine trifluoride, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a mixed gas of tetrafluoromethane and oxygen, or a mixed gas of sulfur hexafluoride and chlorine can be used as the etching gas.
- After that, a resist mask is removed, and plasma treatment 1140 by which surfaces of the second
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b, the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor, theimpurity semiconductor layers 1127, and thewirings 1125 is oxidized or nitrided is performed, whereby the first insulatinglayer 1135 a, the second insulatinglayers 1135 c, and the third insulatinglayers 1135 e shown inFIG. 25C are formed. - The pair of
layers 1132 include an amorphous semiconductor and thus have a weak n-type conductivity. In addition, the pair oflayer 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor has lower density than themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131. Therefore, the second insulatinglayers 1135 c formed by oxidizing or nitriding the pair oflayers 1132 including an amorphous semiconductor is insulating layers having low density and low insulating property. However, in the thin film transistor shown inFIG. 19 , the first insulatinglayer 1135 a formed by oxidizing themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 is formed on a back channel side. The microcrystalline semiconductor layer has higher density than the amorphous semiconductor layer, and the first insulatinglayer 1135 a thus has also high density and a high insulating property. Further, the second insulatinglayer 1131 b has a plurality of conical or pyramidal protrusions (projections) and thus has an uneven surface. Therefore, a leak path between a source region and a drain region has a long distance. Accordingly, a reduction in off-state-current of the thin film transistor can be realized. - Note that here, after the
wirings 1125 are formed, thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is etched so that the secondmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b is exposed. However, the following may be performed. Thewirings 1125 are formed; the resist mask is removed; each of theimpurity semiconductor layer 1117 and thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor is partly etched by dry etching; and the plasma treatment 1140 by which the surface of the secondmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b is oxidized or nitrided is performed. In that case, since theimpurity semiconductor layer 1127 and thelayer 1115 c including an amorphous semiconductor are etched using thewirings 1125 as masks, side surfaces of thewirings 1125 are approximately aligned with side surfaces of the impurity semiconductor layers 1127. - As described above, after the second
microcrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b having conical or pyramidal protrusions (projections) is exposed, an insulating layer is formed on the surface of the secondmicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1131 b by plasma treatment; thus, a leak path between the source region and the drain region can have a long distance, and an insulating layer having a high insulating property can be formed. - A method for manufacturing the
second semiconductor layer 1107, which can be applied to any ofMethods 1 to 3, is described below. In this case, instead of using the gas containing nitrogen as the source gas of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107, by forming thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 after forming a layer containing nitrogen in a treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 can be supplied with nitrogen. - After the
first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed, the substrate is carried out of the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus. Next, a layer containing nitrogen is formed in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus. In this case, as the layer containing nitrogen, a silicon nitride layer is formed. Then, after the substrate is carried into the treatment chamber, a source gas used for deposition of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 is introduced into the treatment chamber, and thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 is formed. In this case, a deposition gas including silicon or germanium, and hydrogen are used as a source gas. The layer containing nitrogen formed on the inner wall of the treatment chamber is exposed to plasma, whereby part of the layer containing nitrogen is dissociated and nitrogen is desorbed. Alternatively, an NH group is generated. As a result, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 contains nitrogen, so that thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 including themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a, themixed layer 1107 b, and thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be formed as shown inFIG. 18A . Alternatively, as shown inFIG. 18B , thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 including themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and themixed layer 1107 b can be formed. - In the
second semiconductor layer 1107 formed by such a method, the nitrogen concentration which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry has a peak at an upper portion of themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a, or in the vicinity of the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and themixed layer 1107 b, and is decreased with respect to a direction in which the second semiconductor layer 107 is deposited. - Through the steps above, the
second semiconductor layer 1107 can be formed. - A method for manufacturing the
second semiconductor layer 1107, which can be applied to any ofMethods 1 to 3, is described below. In this case, instead of using the gas containing nitrogen as the source gas of thesecond semiconductor layer 1107, by forming thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 after introducing a gas containing nitrogen in the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus before forming thesecond semiconductor layer 1107, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 can be supplied with nitrogen. - After the
first semiconductor layer 1106 is formed, the surface of thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 is exposed to the gas containing nitrogen (here, this treatment is referred to as flush treatment), so that nitrogen is supplied to the treatment chamber of the plasma-enhanced CVD apparatus. As examples of the gas containing nitrogen, ammonia, nitrogen, nitrogen fluoride, nitrogen chloride, and the like can be given. In addition, hydrogen may be included in any of the gas containing nitrogen. In this case, the surface of thefirst semiconductor layer 1106 is exposed to ammonia, whereby nitrogen is supplied. - Then, after a source gas used for deposition of the
second semiconductor layer 1107 is introduced into the treatment chamber, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 is formed. In this case, a deposition gas including silicon or germanium, and hydrogen are used as a source gas. - In the formation step of the
second semiconductor layer 1107, a gas containing nitrogen introduced into the treatment chamber by the flush treatment, in this case, ammonia is decomposed by plasma discharge, so that nitrogen is desorbed. Alternatively, an NH group is generated. As a result, thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 contains nitrogen, so that thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 including themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a, themixed layer 1107 b, and thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor can be formed as shown inFIG. 18A . Alternatively, as shown inFIG. 18B , thesecond semiconductor layer 1107 including themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and themixed layer 1107 b can be formed. - In the
second semiconductor layer 1107 formed by such a method, the nitrogen concentration which is measured by secondary ion mass spectrometry has a peak at an upper portion of themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a or in the vicinity of the interface between themicrocrystalline semiconductor layer 1107 a and themixed layer 1107 b and is decreased with respect to a direction in which themixed layer 1107 b and thelayer 1107 c including an amorphous semiconductor are deposited. - Through the steps above, the
second semiconductor layer 1107 can be formed. - In this embodiment, examples of methods for manufacturing a thin film transistor included in a display device are described. Such a structure can be combined with any of the shift registers in
Embodiments 1 to 5. In the case where a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region of the thin film transistor, an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved. Further, by the use of a microcrystalline semiconductor for the channel region, degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, so that the life of the display device can be extended. - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, as an embodiment of a display device, a cross-sectional structure of a liquid crystal display device is described with reference to
FIGS. 26A and 26B . Specifically, the structure of a liquid crystal display device which includes a thin film substrate, a counter substrate, and a liquid crystal layer held between the counter substrate and the TFT substrate is described.FIG. 26A is a top view of the liquid crystal display device.FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-D inFIG. 26A . Note thatFIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal display device where an inverted staggered transistor including a microcrystalline semiconductor in the channel region is formed over asubstrate 1601, and the display mode of the liquid crystal display device is an MVA (multi-domain vertical alignment) mode. - In the liquid crystal display device illustrated in
FIG. 26A , apixel portion 1603, a first scanline driver circuit 1605 a, a second scanline driver circuit 1605 b, and a signal line driver circuit 1607 are formed over thesubstrate 1601. Thepixel portion 1603, the first scanline driver circuit 1605 a, the second scanline driver circuit 1605 b, and the signal line driver circuit 1607 are scaled between thesubstrate 1601 and asubstrate 1611 with asealant 1609. In addition, anFPC 1613 and anIC chip 1615 are provided over thesubstrate 1601 by a TAB method. - A cross-sectional structure taken along line C-D in
FIG. 26A is described with reference toFIG. 26B . In this case, thepixel portion 1603, the scanline driver circuit 1605 b which is part of a peripheral driver circuit portion, and aterminal portion 1617, which are formed over thesubstrate 1601, are shown. - A
thin film transistor 1621 to be provided in the second scanline driver circuit 1605 b and athin film transistor 1623 to be provided in thepixel portion 1603 are formed over thesubstrate 1601. Further, insulatinglayers thin film transistors wiring 1629 to be connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of thethin film transistor 1621 through an opening portion in the insulatinglayer 1625 and apixel electrode 1631 to be connected to a source electrode or a drain electrode of thethin film transistor 1623 through an opening portion in the insulatinglayer 1625 are formed. Moreover, an insulatinglayer 1635 is formed over the insulatinglayer 1627, thewiring 1629, and thepixel electrode 1631. - The contents described in
Embodiments 1 to 6 can be applied to each structure of thethin film transistors 1621 and 1623 a and a method for manufacturing thethin film transistors - Each of the insulating
layer 1625 and the insulatinglayer 1627 can be formed using an inorganic insulating layer, an organic resin layer, or the like. As an inorganic insulating layer, a silicon oxide layer, a silicon oxynitride layer, a silicon nitride oxide layer, or a carbon layer typified by diamond like carbon (DLC), or the like can be used. For an organic resin layer, an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a siloxane polymer can be used. - The insulating
layer 1625 and the insulatinglayer 1627 can be formed by CVD, sputtering, a printing method, a coating method, a slit-coating method, or the like as appropriate. - Since at least one of the insulating
layer 1625 and the insulatinglayer 1627 is formed using an organic resin layer, planarity can be improved; thus, alignment of liquid crystal molecules can easily be controlled. - The
wiring 1629 and thepixel electrode 1631 can be formed using indium oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium zinc oxide containing tungsten oxide, indium oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide containing titanium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, indium tin oxide to which silicon oxide is added, or the like. - Alternatively, the
wiring 1629 and thepixel electrode 1631 can be formed using a conductive composition containing a light-transmitting conductive high molecule (also referred to as a conductive polymer). Each of thewiring 1629 and thepixel electrode 1631 preferably has a sheet resistance less than or equal to 10000 ohms/square and a light transmittance greater than or equal to 70% at a wavelength of 550 nm. The sheet resistance of each of thewiring 1629 and thepixel electrode 1631 is preferably lower. In addition, it is preferable that the resistivity of the conductive high molecule contained in the conductive composition be 0.1 ohm·cm or less. - As the conductive high molecule, a so-called n electron conjugated conductive high molecule can be used. For example, polyaniline or a derivative thereof, polypyrrole or a derivative thereof, polythiophene or a derivative thereof, a copolymer of two or more kinds of them, or the like can be used.
- Note that when the
pixel electrode 1631 functions as a reflective electrode, thepixel electrode 1631 can be formed using aluminum, silver, or the like; or an alloy thereof, or the like. In addition, a two-layer structure of aluminum and titanium, molybdenum, tantalum, chromium, or tungsten; or a three-layer structure in which aluminum is interposed between any of metals such as titanium, molybdenum, tantalum, chromium, or tungsten may be employed. - An opening portion is formed in the
pixel electrode 1631. The opening portion formed in the conductive film can have the same function as a protrusion used in an MVA mode because the opening portion can make liquid crystal molecules slanted. - The insulating
layer 1635 functions as an alignment film. - The
sealant 1609 is formed around thepixel portion 1603, or around thepixel portion 1603 and the peripheral driver circuit portion thereof by an inkjet method or the like. Thesubstrate 1611 on which aconductive layer 1641, an insulatinglayer 1643, aprotrusion 1645, and the like are formed and thesubstrate 1601 are attached to each other with thesealant 1609 with a spacer 1647 interposed therebetween, and aliquid crystal layer 1649 is provided between the two substrates. Note that thesubstrate 1611 functions as a counter substrate. - The spacer 1647 may be formed in a manner that particles of several micrometers are dispersed or in a manner that a resin layer is formed over the entire surface of the substrate and then etched.
- The
conductive layer 1641 functions as a counter electrode. Theconductive layer 1641 can be formed using a material similar to that of thewiring 1629 or thepixel electrode 1631. In addition, the insulatinglayer 1643 functions as an alignment film. - In the
terminal portion 1617, a connection terminal 1659 is formed. The connection terminal 1659 is electrically connected to thepixel portion 1603 and a wiring 1655 in the peripheral driver circuit portion. The connection terminal 1659 is formed in a manner similar to those in thepixel electrode 1631 in thepixel portion 1603 and thewiring 1629 in the peripheral driver circuit portion. - In this case, the
thin film transistors substrate 1601. - The
FPC 1613 is provided over the connection terminal 1659 with an anisotropicconductive layer 1657 interposed therebetween. Further, theIC chip 1615 is provided over theFPC 1613 with an anisotropicconductive layer 1661 interposed therebetween. That is, theFPC 1613, the anisotropicconductive layers IC chip 1615 are electrically connected to each other. - An adhesive material such as an ACF (anisotropic conductive film) or ACP (anisotropic conductive paste) can be used for the anisotropic
conductive layers conductive layers - Note that by forming a functional circuit (e.g., a memory or a buffer) in the
IC chip 1615, the area of the substrate can be efficiently utilized. - Note that although the cross-sectional view in the case where the display mode is the MVA mode is described in
FIG. 26B , the display mode may be a PVA (patterned vertical alignment) mode. In the case of the PVA mode, a slit may be provided for theconductive layer 1641 formed on thesubstrate 1611, so that liquid crystal molecules can be slanted to be aligned. In addition, the protrusion 1645 (also referred to as the alignment control protrusion) may be provided for the conductive film for which the slit is provided, so that liquid crystal molecules can be slanted to be aligned. Further, the display mode of liquid crystals is not limited to the MVA mode or the PVA mode, and a TN (twisted nematic) mode, an IPS (in-plane-switching) mode, an FFS (fringe field switching) mode, an ASM (axially symmetric aligned micro-cell) mode, an OCB (optical compensated birefringence) mode, an FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, an AFLC (antiferroelectric liquid crystal) mode, or the like can be used. - Although the structure is described in which the first scan
line driver circuit 1605 a, the second scanline driver circuit 1605 b, and the signal line driver circuit 1607 are formed over thesubstrate 1601 in the liquid crystal panel inFIGS. 26A and 26B , a structure may be used in which a driver circuit corresponding to the signal line driver circuit 1607 is formed as a driver IC and is mounted on a liquid crystal panel by COG or the like, as illustrated inFIG. 13B . By forming the signal line driver circuit 1607 as the driver IC, power can be saved. In addition, by forming the driver IC as a semiconductor chip formed using a silicon wafer or the like, high speed operation and low power consumption of the liquid crystal panel can be achieved. - In this embodiment, an example of a cross-sectional structure of the display device is described. Such a structure can be combined with any of the shift registers in
Embodiments 1 to 5. In the case where a microcrystalline semiconductor is used for a channel region of the thin film transistor, an increase in the size of the display device, a reduction in cost, an improvement in yield, or the like can be achieved. Further, by the use of a microcrystalline semiconductor for a semiconductor layer, degradation of characteristics of the thin film transistor can be suppressed, so that the life of the display device can be extended. - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- In this embodiment, examples of electronic devices are described.
- A display device according to any of the above embodiments can be used in a variety of electronic devices (including an amusement machine). Examples of electronic devices are a television set (also referred to as a television or a television receiver), a monitor of a computer, electronic paper, a camera such as a digital camera or a digital video camera, a digital photo frame, a mobile phone handset (also referred to as a mobile phone or a mobile phone device), a portable game machine, a portable information terminal, an audio reproducing device, a large game machine such as a pinball machine, and the like.
- Electronic paper which is one embodiment of the display device according to any of the above embodiments can be used in electronic devices in all fields as long as they display information. For example, electronic paper can be used in an electronic book (e-book) reader, a poster, an advertisement in a vehicle such as a train, display of a variety of cards such as credit cards, or the like.
FIG. 27A illustrates an example of an electronic device. -
FIG. 27A illustrates an example of an e-book reader. The e-book reader illustrated inFIG. 27A includes twohousings 1700 and 1701. Thehousings 1700 and 1701 are combined with each other with ahinge 1704, so that the e-book reader can be opened and closed. With such a structure, the e-book reader can be operated like a paper book. - A
display portion 1702 is incorporated in the housing 1700, and adisplay portion 1703 is incorporated in thehousing 1701. Thedisplay portions display portion display portion 1702 inFIG. 27A ) can display text and a display portion on the left side (thedisplay portion 1703 inFIG. 27A ) can display images. -
FIG. 27A illustrates an example in which the housing 1700 includes an operation portion and the like. For example, the housing 1700 includes apower input terminal 1705,operation keys 1706, aspeaker 1707, and the like. With theoperation keys 1706, pages can be turned. Note that a keyboard, a pointing device, or the like may be provided on a surface of the housing, on which the display portion is provided. Further, an external connection terminal (e.g. an earphone terminal, a USB terminal, or a terminal which can be connected to a variety of cables such as USB cables), a recording medium insertion portion, or the like may be provided on a back surface or a side surface of the housing. Furthermore, the e-book reader illustrated inFIG. 27A may serve as an electronic dictionary. - Further, the e-book reader illustrated in
FIG. 27A may transmit and receive data wirelessly. Through wireless communication, data related to a desired book or the like can be purchased and downloaded from an electronic book server. -
FIG. 27B shows an example of a digital photo frame using a display device such as electronic paper, a liquid crystal display device, or a light-emitting display device. For example, in the digital photo frame illustrated inFIG. 27B , adisplay portion 1712 is incorporated in ahousing 1711. Thedisplay portion 1712 can display a variety of images. For example, thedisplay portion 1712 can display data related to images photographed by a digital camera or the like, so that the digital photo frame can function as a normal photo frame. - Note that the digital photo frame illustrated in
FIG. 27B includes an operation portion, an external connection portion (e.g., a USB terminal or a terminal which can be connected to a variety of cables such as USB cables), a recording medium insertion portion, and the like. Although they may be provided on a surface on which the display portion is provided, it is preferable to provide them on a side surface or a back surface because the design of the digital photo frame is improved. For example, a memory which stores data related to images photographed by a digital camera is inserted in the recording medium insertion portion of the digital photo frame, so that the data related to the images can be loaded to the digital photo frame and can be displayed on thedisplay portion 1712. - Further, the digital photo frame illustrated in
FIG. 27B may transmit and receive data wirelessly. Through wireless communication, data related to desired images can be loaded and displayed. -
FIG. 27C shows an example of a television set in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a light-emitting display device is used. In the television set illustrated inFIG. 27C , adisplay portion 1722 is incorporated in ahousing 1721. Thedisplay portion 1722 can display images. Further, here, thehousing 1721 is supported by astand 1723. The display device described in any of the above embodiments can be used in thedisplay portion 1722. - The television set illustrated in
FIG. 27C can be operated by an operation switch of thehousing 1721 or a separate remote controller. Channels and volume can be controlled by operation keys of the remote controller, so that images displayed on thedisplay portion 1722 can be controlled. Further, the remote controller may include a display portion for displaying data output from the remote controller. - Note that the television set illustrated in
FIG. 27C includes a receiver, a modem, and the like. With the receiver, a general television broadcast can be received. Further, by connecting the television set to a wired or wireless communication network via the modem, one-way (from a transmitter to a receiver) or two-way (between a transmitter and a receiver, between receivers, or the like) information communication can be performed. -
FIG. 27D shows an example of a mobile phone handset in which a display device such as electronic paper, a liquid crystal display device, or a light-emitting display device is used. The mobile phone handset illustrated inFIG. 27D includes adisplay portion 1732 incorporated in ahousing 1731,operation buttons external connection port 1734, aspeaker 1735, amicrophone 1736, and the like. - The
display portion 1732 of the mobile phone handset illustrated inFIG. 27D is a touch panel. By touching thedisplay portion 1732 with a finger or the like, contents displayed on thedisplay portion 1732 can be controlled. Further, operations such as making calls and composing mails can be performed by touching the display portion 1002 with a finger or the like. - The
display portion 1732 has mainly three screen modes. The first mode is a display mode mainly for displaying images. The second mode is an input mode mainly for inputting data such as text. The third mode is a display-and-input mode in which two modes of the display mode and the input mode are combined. - For example, in the case of making a call or composing a mail, a text input mode mainly for inputting text is selected for the
display portion 1732 so that text displayed on a screen can be inputted. In this case, it is preferable to display a keyboard or number buttons on a large area of the screen of thedisplay portion 1732. - By providing a detection device including a sensor for detecting inclination, such as a gyroscope or an acceleration sensor, inside the mobile phone handset illustrated in
FIG. 27D , data displayed on thedisplay portion 1732 can be automatically changed by determining the orientation of the mobile phone handset (whether the mobile phone handset is placed horizontally or vertically). - Further, the screen modes are changed by touching the
display portion 1732 or operating theoperation button 1737 of thehousing 1731. Alternatively, the screen modes may be changed depending on the kind of an image displayed on thedisplay portion 1732. For example, when a signal of an image displayed on the display portion is moving image data, the screen mode can be changed into the display mode. When the signal is text data, the screen mode can be changed into the input mode. - Further, in the input mode, when input by touching the
display portion 1732 is not performed for a certain period while a signal detected by an optical sensor in thedisplay portion 1732 is detected, the screen mode may be controlled so as to be changed from the input mode into the display mode. - The
display portion 1732 can also function as an image sensor. For example, the image of a palm print, a fingerprint, or the like is taken by an image sensor by touching thedisplay portion 1732 with the palm or the finger, so that authentication can be performed. Further, by using a backlight which emits near-infrared light or a sensing light source which emits near-infrared light in the display portion, the image of a finger vein, a palm vein, or the like can be taken. - In this embodiment, examples of electronic devices each including the display device described in any of the above embodiments are described. The electronic devices each include a display device in which the shift register in
Embodiment - Note that the contents described in each drawing in this embodiment can be freely combined with or replaced with the contents described in any of the other embodiments as appropriate.
- This application is based on Japanese Patent Application serial no. 2009-029477 filed with Japan Patent Office on Feb. 12, 2009, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
Claims (7)
1. (canceled)
2. A display device comprising:
a shift register comprising:
a first transistor;
a second transistor;
a third transistor;
a fourth transistor;
a fifth transistor;
a sixth transistor;
a seventh transistor;
an eighth transistor; and
a capacitor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the second transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the third transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the fourth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the third transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the first transistor through the eighth transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the sixth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the seventh transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the second transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the fourth transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fourth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the sixth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the gate of the first transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the one of the source and the drain of the third transistor,
wherein a gate of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to the third wiring,
wherein a first electrode of the capacitor is electrically connected to the gate of the second transistor, and
wherein a second electrode of the capacitor is electrically connected to the second wiring.
3. The display device according to claim 2 ,
wherein a gate of the third transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the sixth transistor.
4. A display device comprising:
a shift register comprising:
a first transistor;
a second transistor;
a third transistor;
a fourth transistor;
a fifth transistor;
a sixth transistor;
a seventh transistor;
an eighth transistor; and
a capacitor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the second transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the third transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the fourth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the third transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the first transistor through the eighth transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the sixth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the seventh transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the second transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the fourth transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to a signal line,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to a first power supply line,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fourth transistor is electrically connected to the first power supply line,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the sixth transistor is electrically connected to the first power supply line,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the gate of the first transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the one of the source and the drain of the third transistor,
wherein a gate of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to a second power supply line,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to the second power supply line,
wherein a first electrode of the capacitor is electrically connected to the gate of the second transistor, and
wherein a second electrode of the capacitor is electrically connected to the first power supply line.
5. The display device according to claim 4 ,
wherein a gate of the third transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the sixth transistor.
6. A display device comprising:
a shift register comprising:
a first transistor;
a second transistor;
a third transistor;
a fourth transistor;
a fifth transistor;
a sixth transistor;
a seventh transistor;
an eighth transistor;
a ninth transistor;
a tenth transistor;
an eleventh transistor;
a twelfth transistor;
a thirteenth transistor;
a fourteenth transistor;
a fifteenth transistor;
a sixteenth transistor;
a first capacitor; and
a second capacitor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the second transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the third transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the fourth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the third transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the first transistor through the eighth transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the sixth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the seventh transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the second transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the fourth transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to a first wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to a second wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fourth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the sixth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the gate of the first transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to the one of the source and the drain of the third transistor,
wherein a gate of the eighth transistor is electrically connected to a third wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fifth transistor is electrically connected to the third wiring,
wherein a first electrode of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the gate of the second transistor,
wherein a second electrode of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the ninth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the tenth transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the eleventh transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the twelfth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the eleventh transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the ninth transistor through the sixteenth transistor,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the thirteenth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the fourteenth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the thirteenth transistor is electrically connected to one of a source and a drain of the fifteenth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the thirteenth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the tenth transistor,
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the thirteenth transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the twelfth transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the ninth transistor is electrically connected to a fourth wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the tenth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the twelfth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the fourteenth transistor is electrically connected to the second wiring,
wherein one of a source and a drain of the sixteenth transistor is electrically connected to the gate of the ninth transistor,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the sixteenth transistor is electrically connected to the one of the source and the drain of the eleventh transistor,
wherein a gate of the sixteenth transistor is electrically connected to the third wiring,
wherein the other of the source and the drain of the thirteenth transistor is electrically connected to the third wiring,
wherein a first electrode of the second capacitor is electrically connected to the gate of the tenth transistor,
wherein a second electrode of the second capacitor is electrically connected to the second wiring, and
wherein the one of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the eleventh transistor.
7. The display device according to claim 6 ,
wherein a gate of the third transistor is electrically connected to a gate of the sixth transistor.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/742,642 US20220278680A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2022-05-12 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
Applications Claiming Priority (7)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2009029477 | 2009-02-12 | ||
JP2009-029477 | 2009-02-12 | ||
US12/699,929 US8330702B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2010-02-04 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US13/709,377 US9048117B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2012-12-10 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US14/716,918 US20150303913A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2015-05-20 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US15/946,122 US20180234090A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2018-04-05 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US17/742,642 US20220278680A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2022-05-12 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/946,122 Continuation US20180234090A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2018-04-05 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20220278680A1 true US20220278680A1 (en) | 2022-09-01 |
Family
ID=42540038
Family Applications (5)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/699,929 Active 2031-04-21 US8330702B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2010-02-04 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US13/709,377 Active 2030-03-07 US9048117B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2012-12-10 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US14/716,918 Abandoned US20150303913A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2015-05-20 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US15/946,122 Abandoned US20180234090A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2018-04-05 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US17/742,642 Abandoned US20220278680A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2022-05-12 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
Family Applications Before (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/699,929 Active 2031-04-21 US8330702B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2010-02-04 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US13/709,377 Active 2030-03-07 US9048117B2 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2012-12-10 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US14/716,918 Abandoned US20150303913A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2015-05-20 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
US15/946,122 Abandoned US20180234090A1 (en) | 2009-02-12 | 2018-04-05 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (5) | US8330702B2 (en) |
JP (11) | JP5394276B2 (en) |
KR (7) | KR101614748B1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11550568B1 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2023-01-10 | Stripe, Inc. | Automatically deploying artifacts |
Families Citing this family (50)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8330492B2 (en) | 2006-06-02 | 2012-12-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and electronic device |
KR101698751B1 (en) | 2009-10-16 | 2017-01-23 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device, display device and electronic device |
US8383434B2 (en) * | 2010-02-22 | 2013-02-26 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Thin film transistor and manufacturing method thereof |
KR101828960B1 (en) | 2010-03-02 | 2018-02-13 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Pulse signal output circuit and shift register |
KR101349781B1 (en) * | 2010-07-01 | 2014-01-09 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Gate driver circuit and liquid crystal display comprising the same |
TWI409528B (en) * | 2010-07-02 | 2013-09-21 | Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd | Display panel |
US9230826B2 (en) * | 2010-08-26 | 2016-01-05 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Etching method using mixed gas and method for manufacturing semiconductor device |
JP5856826B2 (en) * | 2010-12-10 | 2016-02-10 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
US9466618B2 (en) | 2011-05-13 | 2016-10-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device including two thin film transistors and method of manufacturing the same |
US8736315B2 (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2014-05-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
JP2013093565A (en) * | 2011-10-07 | 2013-05-16 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Semiconductor device |
KR101891651B1 (en) * | 2011-11-14 | 2018-08-27 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Scan driving device and driving method thereof |
CN106920512B (en) * | 2011-11-30 | 2019-12-03 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Display device |
US9742378B2 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2017-08-22 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Pulse output circuit and semiconductor device |
TWI635501B (en) | 2012-07-20 | 2018-09-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
CN202905121U (en) * | 2012-09-13 | 2013-04-24 | 北京京东方光电科技有限公司 | Shift register unit circuit, shift register, array substrate and display apparatus |
TW201412027A (en) * | 2012-09-14 | 2014-03-16 | Chicony Electronics Co Ltd | Matrix testing method and system and voltage clock control method |
TWI500265B (en) * | 2012-11-22 | 2015-09-11 | Au Optronics Corp | Shift register |
JP6475424B2 (en) | 2013-06-05 | 2019-02-27 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
JP2015004911A (en) * | 2013-06-24 | 2015-01-08 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Electro-optic panel and electronic equipment |
CN103714780B (en) | 2013-12-24 | 2015-07-15 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Grid driving circuit, grid driving method, array substrate row driving circuit and display device |
CN103730089B (en) | 2013-12-26 | 2015-11-25 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Gate driver circuit, method, array base palte horizontal drive circuit and display device |
KR102156769B1 (en) * | 2013-12-26 | 2020-09-16 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and gate shift resgister initialting method of the same |
CN103714781B (en) * | 2013-12-30 | 2016-03-30 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Gate driver circuit, method, array base palte horizontal drive circuit and display device |
CN103996367B (en) * | 2014-04-18 | 2017-01-25 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shifting register, gate drive circuit and display device |
CN104008779B (en) * | 2014-05-27 | 2017-03-15 | 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 | Shift register and its driving method, shift register group and its driving method |
CN104050910B (en) * | 2014-06-16 | 2016-08-31 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shift register cell, gate driver circuit and display floater |
KR102223438B1 (en) * | 2014-07-03 | 2021-03-05 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device and display panel integrated with touch screen panel |
JP6459271B2 (en) * | 2014-07-23 | 2019-01-30 | Tianma Japan株式会社 | Image sensor and driving method thereof |
JP6521794B2 (en) | 2014-09-03 | 2019-05-29 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and electronic device |
KR102231716B1 (en) * | 2014-11-13 | 2021-03-25 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Scanline driver and display device including the same |
CN104599630B (en) * | 2014-12-16 | 2017-04-19 | 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 | Driving circuit, lighting control circuit, display panel and display device |
CN105895011B (en) * | 2015-01-26 | 2019-02-15 | 上海和辉光电有限公司 | Shift register cell, gate driving circuit and display panel |
CN104700806B (en) * | 2015-03-26 | 2017-01-25 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shifting register, grid drive circuit, display panel and display device |
CN104778928B (en) | 2015-03-26 | 2017-04-05 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of shift register, gate driver circuit, display floater and display device |
CN104751816B (en) * | 2015-03-31 | 2017-08-15 | 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 | Shift-register circuit |
KR101596377B1 (en) * | 2015-04-08 | 2016-02-22 | 실리콘 디스플레이 (주) | Capacitive fingerprint sensor |
CN104992661B (en) * | 2015-07-29 | 2017-09-19 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shift register circuit and its driving method, gate driving circuit and display device |
CN105185290B (en) * | 2015-09-06 | 2017-10-10 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of shift register, its driving method, gate driving circuit and display device |
US10033361B2 (en) * | 2015-12-28 | 2018-07-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Level-shift circuit, driver IC, and electronic device |
CN105528118B (en) * | 2016-02-17 | 2018-05-18 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Touch-control display panel and its driving method, the method for detecting of inductive signal |
CN105575315B (en) * | 2016-02-26 | 2018-01-23 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shift register cell and its driving method, gate scanning circuit and display device |
KR102511947B1 (en) * | 2016-06-17 | 2023-03-21 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Stage and Organic Light Emitting Display Device Using the same |
CN106548748B (en) * | 2017-02-06 | 2019-06-11 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Clock signal transmission circuit and driving method, gate driving circuit, display device |
CN107424552B (en) * | 2017-06-13 | 2019-11-05 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shift register cell, driving method, gate driving circuit and display device |
CN110910828B (en) * | 2018-09-14 | 2022-01-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | Screen module and electronic equipment |
KR102176829B1 (en) | 2018-12-12 | 2020-11-11 | 삼원액트 주식회사 | front side grid module for solar cell |
CN111223454B (en) * | 2020-03-23 | 2021-07-02 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Light-emitting control circuit, light-emitting control module and electronic equipment |
CN111477181B (en) | 2020-05-22 | 2021-08-27 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Gate driving circuit, display substrate, display device and gate driving method |
CN114255701B (en) | 2020-09-25 | 2022-12-20 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shift register unit, driving method, driving circuit and display device |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20040140839A1 (en) * | 2003-01-17 | 2004-07-22 | Shou Nagao | Pulse output circuit, shift register and electronic equipment |
US20050220262A1 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2005-10-06 | Lg Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Shift register |
US20080101529A1 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2008-05-01 | Mitsubishi Electric Corporation | Shift register and image display apparatus containing the same |
US20090041177A1 (en) * | 2007-08-07 | 2009-02-12 | Au Optronics Corp. | Shift register arrays |
Family Cites Families (83)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS56122123A (en) * | 1980-03-03 | 1981-09-25 | Shunpei Yamazaki | Semiamorphous semiconductor |
JPS6133016A (en) * | 1984-07-26 | 1986-02-15 | Sony Corp | Signal transmission circuit |
JP3189990B2 (en) * | 1991-09-27 | 2001-07-16 | キヤノン株式会社 | Electronic circuit device |
US5410583A (en) * | 1993-10-28 | 1995-04-25 | Rca Thomson Licensing Corporation | Shift register useful as a select line scanner for a liquid crystal display |
US5517542A (en) * | 1995-03-06 | 1996-05-14 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, S.A. | Shift register with a transistor operating in a low duty cycle |
FR2743662B1 (en) * | 1996-01-11 | 1998-02-13 | Thomson Lcd | IMPROVEMENT IN SHIFT REGISTERS USING TRANSISTORS OF THE SAME POLARITY |
JP2921510B2 (en) * | 1996-10-07 | 1999-07-19 | 日本電気株式会社 | Bootstrap circuit |
KR100242244B1 (en) * | 1997-08-09 | 2000-02-01 | 구본준 | Scanning circuit |
KR100438525B1 (en) * | 1999-02-09 | 2004-07-03 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | Shift Register Circuit |
KR100281336B1 (en) * | 1998-10-21 | 2001-03-02 | 구본준 | Shift register circuit |
JP3911923B2 (en) * | 1999-09-27 | 2007-05-09 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Shift register and electronic device |
TW525139B (en) * | 2001-02-13 | 2003-03-21 | Samsung Electronics Co Ltd | Shift register, liquid crystal display using the same and method for driving gate line and data line blocks thereof |
KR100752602B1 (en) * | 2001-02-13 | 2007-08-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Shift resister and liquid crystal display using the same |
JP4761643B2 (en) * | 2001-04-13 | 2011-08-31 | 東芝モバイルディスプレイ株式会社 | Shift register, drive circuit, electrode substrate, and flat display device |
JP4439761B2 (en) | 2001-05-11 | 2010-03-24 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Liquid crystal display device, electronic equipment |
JP4310939B2 (en) * | 2001-06-29 | 2009-08-12 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Shift register and electronic device |
US6788108B2 (en) * | 2001-07-30 | 2004-09-07 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device |
US7050036B2 (en) * | 2001-12-12 | 2006-05-23 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Shift register with a built in level shifter |
AU2003240026A1 (en) * | 2002-06-15 | 2003-12-31 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of driving a shift register, a shift register, a liquid crystal display device having the shift register |
JP2004094058A (en) * | 2002-09-02 | 2004-03-25 | Semiconductor Energy Lab Co Ltd | Liquid crystal display and its driving method |
JP4460822B2 (en) * | 2002-11-29 | 2010-05-12 | 東芝モバイルディスプレイ株式会社 | Bidirectional shift register, drive circuit using the same, and flat display device |
KR100917009B1 (en) | 2003-02-10 | 2009-09-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for driving transistor and shift register, and shift register for performing the same |
US7369111B2 (en) * | 2003-04-29 | 2008-05-06 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Gate driving circuit and display apparatus having the same |
US7486269B2 (en) * | 2003-07-09 | 2009-02-03 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Shift register, scan driving circuit and display apparatus having the same |
JP4480968B2 (en) | 2003-07-18 | 2010-06-16 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
KR100995637B1 (en) * | 2003-12-29 | 2010-11-19 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Shift register |
JP2005251348A (en) * | 2004-03-08 | 2005-09-15 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Shift register circuit and its driving control method |
KR101073263B1 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2011-10-12 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Shift register and method for driving the same |
US8605027B2 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2013-12-10 | Samsung Display Co., Ltd. | Shift register, display device having the same and method of driving the same |
KR101056375B1 (en) | 2004-10-01 | 2011-08-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Shift register, gate driving circuit and display panel using same |
JP2006106320A (en) * | 2004-10-05 | 2006-04-20 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Driving circuit of liquid crystal display device |
KR101110133B1 (en) * | 2004-12-28 | 2012-02-20 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Shift register for LCD |
KR101078454B1 (en) * | 2004-12-31 | 2011-10-31 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Shift register without noises and liquid crystal display device having thereof |
JP4993544B2 (en) | 2005-03-30 | 2012-08-08 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Shift register circuit |
JP4785603B2 (en) * | 2005-04-26 | 2011-10-05 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device and driving method thereof |
JP2006309893A (en) | 2005-04-28 | 2006-11-09 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Shift register and liquid crystal drive circuit |
JP2006344306A (en) * | 2005-06-09 | 2006-12-21 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Shift register |
KR101183431B1 (en) * | 2005-06-23 | 2012-09-14 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Gate driver |
KR101152129B1 (en) * | 2005-06-23 | 2012-06-15 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Shift register for display device and display device including shift register |
KR100729099B1 (en) * | 2005-09-20 | 2007-06-14 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | scan driving circuit and Organic Light Emitting Display Using the same |
JP4644087B2 (en) * | 2005-09-29 | 2011-03-02 | 株式会社 日立ディスプレイズ | Shift register circuit and display device using the same |
US7310402B2 (en) * | 2005-10-18 | 2007-12-18 | Au Optronics Corporation | Gate line drivers for active matrix displays |
JP5291874B2 (en) | 2005-10-18 | 2013-09-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, shift register, display device |
US9153341B2 (en) * | 2005-10-18 | 2015-10-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Shift register, semiconductor device, display device, and electronic device |
JP5132884B2 (en) * | 2005-12-28 | 2013-01-30 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Shift register circuit and image display apparatus including the same |
JP5164383B2 (en) | 2006-01-07 | 2013-03-21 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, display device, liquid crystal display device, display module, and electronic apparatus |
JP5079350B2 (en) * | 2006-04-25 | 2012-11-21 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Shift register circuit |
JP2007317288A (en) * | 2006-05-25 | 2007-12-06 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Shift register circuit and image display equipped therewith |
TWI338879B (en) * | 2006-05-30 | 2011-03-11 | Au Optronics Corp | Shift register |
US8330492B2 (en) * | 2006-06-02 | 2012-12-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device and electronic device |
US7738622B2 (en) * | 2006-06-23 | 2010-06-15 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Shift register |
JP5079425B2 (en) * | 2006-08-31 | 2012-11-21 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, display device, liquid crystal display device, display module, and electronic apparatus |
EP1895545B1 (en) * | 2006-08-31 | 2014-04-23 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
TWI347577B (en) * | 2006-09-01 | 2011-08-21 | Au Optronics Corp | Shift register with low stress |
TWI336870B (en) * | 2006-09-01 | 2011-02-01 | Au Optronics Corp | Signal-driving system and shift register unit thereof |
TWI349908B (en) * | 2006-09-14 | 2011-10-01 | Au Optronics Corp | Shift register, shift register array circuit, and flat display apparatus |
JP5116277B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2013-01-09 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, display device, liquid crystal display device, display module, and electronic apparatus |
JP5468196B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2014-04-09 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device, display device, and liquid crystal display device |
JP4932415B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2012-05-16 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device |
TWI831616B (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2024-02-01 | 日商半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Semiconductor device |
KR101368822B1 (en) * | 2006-10-12 | 2014-03-04 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Gate driving circuit and display apparatus having the same |
JP5525685B2 (en) * | 2006-10-17 | 2014-06-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Semiconductor device and electronic equipment |
TWI427602B (en) * | 2006-10-17 | 2014-02-21 | Semiconductor Energy Lab | Pulse output circuit, shift register, and display device |
JP4970004B2 (en) * | 2006-11-20 | 2012-07-04 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Shift register circuit, image display device including the same, and signal generation circuit |
JP4968671B2 (en) | 2006-11-27 | 2012-07-04 | Nltテクノロジー株式会社 | Semiconductor circuit, scanning circuit, and display device using the same |
JP4912186B2 (en) * | 2007-03-05 | 2012-04-11 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Shift register circuit and image display apparatus including the same |
US8552948B2 (en) | 2007-04-05 | 2013-10-08 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device comprising threshold control circuit |
JP5042077B2 (en) | 2007-04-06 | 2012-10-03 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
KR100873078B1 (en) * | 2007-04-10 | 2008-12-09 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Pixel, Organic Light Emitting Display Device and Driving Method Thereof |
KR100897255B1 (en) | 2007-04-12 | 2009-05-14 | 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 | Circuit and method for on die termination of semiconductor memory apparatus |
TWI337003B (en) * | 2007-04-16 | 2011-02-01 | Hannstar Display Corp | Shift register apparatus and shift register thereof |
WO2009034750A1 (en) | 2007-09-12 | 2009-03-19 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Shift register |
US8314765B2 (en) * | 2008-06-17 | 2012-11-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Driver circuit, display device, and electronic device |
JP4582216B2 (en) * | 2008-07-12 | 2010-11-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Semiconductor device, display panel and electronic equipment |
JP2010130576A (en) * | 2008-11-28 | 2010-06-10 | Kyocera Corp | Electric circuit, shift register circuit, driver circuit, and image display device |
KR101510904B1 (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2015-04-20 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Liquid crystal display device |
US8872751B2 (en) * | 2009-03-26 | 2014-10-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device having interconnected transistors and electronic device including the same |
US8319528B2 (en) * | 2009-03-26 | 2012-11-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device having interconnected transistors and electronic device including semiconductor device |
EP2234100B1 (en) * | 2009-03-26 | 2016-11-02 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display device |
KR102286284B1 (en) * | 2009-11-06 | 2021-08-06 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP5484584B2 (en) * | 2010-09-02 | 2014-05-07 | シャープ株式会社 | Flip-flop, shift register, driver circuit, display device |
KR20120065788A (en) * | 2010-12-13 | 2012-06-21 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | A shift register and a display apparatus |
TWI635501B (en) * | 2012-07-20 | 2018-09-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device |
-
2010
- 2010-02-04 US US12/699,929 patent/US8330702B2/en active Active
- 2010-02-05 JP JP2010023729A patent/JP5394276B2/en active Active
- 2010-02-09 KR KR1020100011869A patent/KR101614748B1/en active IP Right Grant
-
2012
- 2012-12-10 US US13/709,377 patent/US9048117B2/en active Active
-
2013
- 2013-10-16 JP JP2013215181A patent/JP2014059947A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2014
- 2014-09-17 JP JP2014188996A patent/JP2015043252A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2014-10-30 JP JP2014221277A patent/JP2015064585A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2015
- 2015-03-17 KR KR1020150036469A patent/KR101716107B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2015-05-04 JP JP2015094492A patent/JP5986260B2/en active Active
- 2015-05-20 US US14/716,918 patent/US20150303913A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2016
- 2016-08-04 JP JP2016153756A patent/JP2017004589A/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2017
- 2017-03-07 KR KR1020170028959A patent/KR101844246B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2017-06-29 JP JP2017127149A patent/JP6502424B2/en active Active
-
2018
- 2018-03-26 KR KR1020180034378A patent/KR101961636B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2018-04-05 US US15/946,122 patent/US20180234090A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2019
- 2019-03-18 KR KR1020190030567A patent/KR20190031463A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2019-03-20 JP JP2019052298A patent/JP6818796B2/en active Active
- 2019-09-25 KR KR1020190117874A patent/KR102094809B1/en active IP Right Grant
-
2020
- 2020-03-23 KR KR1020200034806A patent/KR102168285B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2020-12-28 JP JP2020218713A patent/JP7153709B2/en active Active
-
2022
- 2022-05-12 US US17/742,642 patent/US20220278680A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2022-10-03 JP JP2022159511A patent/JP7408751B2/en active Active
-
2023
- 2023-12-20 JP JP2023214657A patent/JP2024045103A/en active Pending
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20040140839A1 (en) * | 2003-01-17 | 2004-07-22 | Shou Nagao | Pulse output circuit, shift register and electronic equipment |
US20050220262A1 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2005-10-06 | Lg Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Shift register |
US20080101529A1 (en) * | 2006-10-26 | 2008-05-01 | Mitsubishi Electric Corporation | Shift register and image display apparatus containing the same |
US20090041177A1 (en) * | 2007-08-07 | 2009-02-12 | Au Optronics Corp. | Shift register arrays |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11550568B1 (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2023-01-10 | Stripe, Inc. | Automatically deploying artifacts |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20220278680A1 (en) | Pulse output circuit, display device, and electronic device | |
US8530897B2 (en) | Display device including an inverter circuit having a microcrystalline layer | |
US9257085B2 (en) | Electronic circuit, display device, electronic device, and method for driving electronic circuit | |
US9070338B2 (en) | Display device, driving method of the same and electronic device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |